]> code.delx.au - gnu-emacs/blob - doc/misc/cc-mode.texi
Fix copyright years by hand
[gnu-emacs] / doc / misc / cc-mode.texi
1 \input texinfo
2 @c Notes to self regarding line handling:
3 @c
4 @c Empty lines are often significant before @end directives; avoid them.
5 @c
6 @c Empty lines before and after @example directives are significant in
7 @c info output but not in TeX. Empty lines inside @example directives
8 @c are significant.
9
10 @c Conventions for formatting examples:
11 @c o If the example contains empty lines then put the surrounding empty
12 @c lines inside the @example directives. Put them outside otherwise.
13 @c o Use @group inside the example only if it shows indentation where
14 @c the relation between lines inside is relevant.
15 @c o Format line number columns like this:
16 @c 1: foo
17 @c 2: bar
18 @c ^ one space
19 @c ^^ two columns, right alignment
20 @c o Check line lengths in TeX output; they can typically be no longer
21 @c than 70 chars, 60 if the paragraph is indented.
22
23 @comment TBD: Document the finer details of statement anchoring?
24
25 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
26 @comment %**start of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region)
27 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
28
29
30 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
31 @comment How to make the various output formats:
32 @comment (Thanks to Robert Chassell for supplying this information.)
33 @comment Note that Texinfo 4.7 (or later) is needed.
34 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
35 @ignore
36 In each of the following pairs of commands, the first generates a
37 version with cross references pointing to the GNU Emacs manuals,
38 the second with them pointing to the XEmacs manuals.
39 ## Info output
40 makeinfo cc-mode.texi
41 makeinfo -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi
42
43 ## DVI output
44 ## You may need to set up the environment variable TEXINPUTS so
45 ## that tex can find the file texinfo.tex - See the tex
46 ## manpage.
47 texi2dvi cc-mode.texi
48 texi2dvi -t "@set XEMACS " cc-mode.texi
49
50 ## HTML output. (The --no-split parameter is optional)
51 makeinfo --html --no-split cc-mode.texi
52 makeinfo --html --no-split -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi
53
54 ## Plain text output
55 makeinfo --fill-column=70 --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
56 --no-headers --output=cc-mode.txt cc-mode.texi
57 makeinfo --fill-column=70 --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
58 --no-headers --output=cc-mode.txt -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi
59
60 ## DocBook output
61 makeinfo --docbook --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
62 cc-mode.texi
63 makeinfo --docbook --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
64 -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi
65
66 ## XML output
67 makeinfo --xml --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
68 cc-mode.texi
69 makeinfo --xml --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
70 -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi
71
72 #### (You must be in the same directory as the viewed file.)
73
74 ## View DVI output
75 xdvi cc-mode.dvi &
76
77 ## View HTML output
78 mozilla cc-mode.html
79 @end ignore
80
81 @comment No overfull hbox marks in the dvi file.
82 @finalout
83
84 @setfilename ../../info/ccmode.info
85 @settitle CC Mode Manual
86 @include docstyle.texi
87 @footnotestyle end
88
89 @c The following four macros generate the filenames and titles of the
90 @c main (X)Emacs manual and the Elisp/Lispref manual. Leave the
91 @c Texinfo variable 'XEMACS' unset to generate a GNU Emacs version, set it
92 @c to generate an XEmacs version, e.g., with
93 @c "makeinfo -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi".
94 @ifset XEMACS
95 @macro emacsman
96 xemacs
97 @end macro
98 @macro emacsmantitle
99 XEmacs User's Manual
100 @end macro
101 @macro lispref
102 lispref
103 @end macro
104 @macro lispreftitle
105 XEmacs Lisp Reference Manual
106 @end macro
107 @end ifset
108
109 @ifclear XEMACS
110 @macro emacsman
111 emacs
112 @end macro
113 @macro emacsmantitle
114 GNU Emacs Manual
115 @end macro
116 @macro lispref
117 elisp
118 @end macro
119 @macro lispreftitle
120 GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual
121 @end macro
122 @end ifclear
123
124
125 @macro ccmode
126 CC Mode
127 @end macro
128
129 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
130 @comment @setchapternewpage odd !! we don't want blank pages !!
131 @comment %**end of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region)
132 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
133
134
135 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
136 @comment
137 @comment Texinfo manual for CC Mode
138 @comment Generated from the original README file by Krishna Padmasola
139 @comment <krishna@earth-gw.njit.edu>
140 @comment
141 @comment Authors:
142 @comment Barry A. Warsaw
143 @comment Martin Stjernholm
144 @comment Alan Mackenzie
145 @comment
146 @comment Maintained by Martin Stjernholm and Alan Mackenzie <bug-cc-mode@gnu.org>
147 @comment
148 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
149
150 @comment Define an index for syntactic symbols.
151 @defindex ss
152
153 @comment Combine key, syntactic symbol and concept indices into one.
154 @syncodeindex ss cp
155 @syncodeindex ky cp
156
157 @copying
158 This manual is for CC Mode in Emacs.
159
160 Copyright @copyright{} 1995--2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
161
162 @quotation
163 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
164 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or
165 any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no
166 Invariant Sections, with the Front-Cover Texts being ``A GNU Manual'',
167 and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below. A copy of the license
168 is included in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
169
170 (a) The FSF's Back-Cover Text is: ``You have the freedom to copy and
171 modify this GNU manual.''
172 @end quotation
173 @end copying
174
175 @comment Info directory entry for use by install-info. The indentation
176 @comment here is by request from the FSF folks.
177 @dircategory Emacs editing modes
178 @direntry
179 * CC Mode: (ccmode). Emacs mode for editing C, C++, Objective-C,
180 Java, Pike, AWK, and CORBA IDL code.
181 @end direntry
182
183 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
184 @comment TeX title page
185 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
186
187 @titlepage
188 @sp 10
189
190 @center @titlefont{CC Mode 5.32}
191 @sp 2
192 @center A GNU Emacs mode for editing C and C-like languages
193 @sp 2
194 @center Barry A. Warsaw, Martin Stjernholm, Alan Mackenzie
195
196 @page
197 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
198 @insertcopying
199
200 This manual was generated from cc-mode.texi, which is distributed with Emacs,
201 or can be downloaded from @url{http://savannah.gnu.org/projects/emacs/}.
202 @end titlepage
203
204 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
205 @comment The Top node contains the master menu for the Info file.
206 @comment This appears only in the Info file, not the printed manual.
207 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
208
209 @summarycontents
210 @contents
211
212 @node Top, Introduction, (dir), (dir)
213 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
214
215 @ifnottex
216 @top @ccmode{}
217
218 @ccmode{} is a GNU Emacs mode for editing files containing C, C++,
219 Objective-C, Java, CORBA IDL (and the variants PSDL and CIDL), Pike
220 and AWK code. It provides syntax-based indentation, font locking, and
221 has several handy commands and some minor modes to make the editing
222 easier. It does not provide tools to look up and navigate between
223 functions, classes, etc.; there are other packages for that.
224
225 @insertcopying
226 @end ifnottex
227
228 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
229 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
230
231 @menu
232 * Introduction::
233 * Overview::
234 * Getting Started::
235 * Commands::
236 * Font Locking::
237 * Config Basics::
238 * Custom Filling and Breaking::
239 * Custom Auto-newlines::
240 * Clean-ups::
241 * Indentation Engine Basics::
242 * Customizing Indentation::
243 * Custom Macros::
244 * Odds and Ends::
245 * Sample Init File::
246 * Performance Issues::
247 * Limitations and Known Bugs::
248 * FAQ::
249 * Updating CC Mode::
250 * Mailing Lists and Bug Reports::
251 * GNU Free Documentation License::
252 * Command and Function Index::
253 * Variable Index::
254 * Concept and Key Index::
255
256 @detailmenu
257 --- The Detailed Node Listing ---
258
259 Commands
260
261 * Indentation Commands::
262 * Comment Commands::
263 * Movement Commands::
264 * Filling and Breaking::
265 * Minor Modes::
266 * Electric Keys::
267 * Auto-newlines::
268 * Hungry WS Deletion::
269 * Subword Movement::
270 * Other Commands::
271
272 Font Locking
273
274 * Font Locking Preliminaries::
275 * Faces::
276 * Doc Comments::
277 * AWK Mode Font Locking::
278
279 Configuration Basics
280
281 * CC Hooks::
282 * Style Variables::
283 * Styles::
284
285 Styles
286
287 * Built-in Styles::
288 * Choosing a Style::
289 * Adding Styles::
290 * Guessing the Style::
291 * File Styles::
292
293 Customizing Auto-newlines
294
295 * Hanging Braces::
296 * Hanging Colons::
297 * Hanging Semicolons and Commas::
298
299 Hanging Braces
300
301 * Custom Braces::
302
303 Indentation Engine Basics
304
305 * Syntactic Analysis::
306 * Syntactic Symbols::
307 * Indentation Calculation::
308
309 Syntactic Symbols
310
311 * Function Symbols::
312 * Class Symbols::
313 * Conditional Construct Symbols::
314 * Switch Statement Symbols::
315 * Brace List Symbols::
316 * External Scope Symbols::
317 * Paren List Symbols::
318 * Literal Symbols::
319 * Multiline Macro Symbols::
320 * Objective-C Method Symbols::
321 * Java Symbols::
322 * Statement Block Symbols::
323 * K&R Symbols::
324
325 Customizing Indentation
326
327 * c-offsets-alist::
328 * Interactive Customization::
329 * Line-Up Functions::
330 * Custom Line-Up::
331 * Other Indentation::
332
333 Line-Up Functions
334
335 * Brace/Paren Line-Up::
336 * List Line-Up::
337 * Operator Line-Up::
338 * Comment Line-Up::
339 * Misc Line-Up::
340
341 Customizing Macros
342
343 * Macro Backslashes::
344 * Macros with ;::
345
346 @end detailmenu
347 @end menu
348
349 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
350 @node Introduction, Overview, Top, Top
351 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
352 @chapter Introduction
353 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
354
355 @cindex BOCM
356 @cindex history
357 @cindex awk-mode.el
358 @cindex c-mode.el
359 @cindex c++-mode.el
360
361 Welcome to @ccmode{}, a GNU Emacs mode for editing files containing C,
362 C++, Objective-C, Java, CORBA IDL (and the variants CORBA PSDL and
363 CIDL), Pike and AWK code. This incarnation of the mode is descended
364 from @file{c-mode.el} (also called ``Boring Old C Mode'' or BOCM
365 @t{:-)}, @file{c++-mode.el} version 2, which Barry Warsaw had been
366 maintaining since 1992, and @file{awk-mode.el}, a long neglected mode
367 in the (X)Emacs base.
368
369 Late in 1997, Martin Stjernholm joined Barry on the @ccmode{}
370 Maintainers Team, and implemented the Pike support. In 2000 Martin
371 took over as the sole maintainer. In 2001 Alan Mackenzie joined the
372 team, implementing AWK support in version 5.30. @ccmode{} did not
373 originally contain the font lock support for its languages; that
374 was added in version 5.30.
375
376 This manual describes @ccmode{}
377 @comment The following line must appear on its own, so that the
378 version 5.32.
379 @comment Release.py script can update the version number automatically
380
381 @ccmode{} supports the editing of C, C++, Objective-C,
382 Java, CORBA's Interface Definition Language, Pike@footnote{A C-like
383 scripting language with its roots in the LPC language used in some MUD
384 engines. See @uref{http://pike.ida.liu.se/}.} and AWK files. In this
385 way, you can easily set up consistent font locking and coding styles for
386 use in editing all of these languages, although AWK is not yet as
387 uniformly integrated as the other languages.
388
389 @findex c-mode
390 @findex c++-mode
391 @findex objc-mode
392 @findex java-mode
393 @findex idl-mode
394 @findex pike-mode
395 @findex awk-mode
396 Note that the name of this package is ``@ccmode{}'', but there is no top
397 level @code{cc-mode} entry point. All of the variables, commands, and
398 functions in @ccmode{} are prefixed with @code{c-@var{thing}}, and
399 @code{c-mode}, @code{c++-mode}, @code{objc-mode}, @code{java-mode},
400 @code{idl-mode}, @code{pike-mode}, and @code{awk-mode} entry points are
401 provided. This package is intended to be a replacement for
402 @file{c-mode.el}, @file{c++-mode.el} and @file{awk-mode.el}.
403
404 A special word of thanks goes to Krishna Padmasola for his work in
405 converting the original @file{README} file to Texinfo format. I'd
406 also like to thank all the @ccmode{} victims who help enormously
407 during the early beta stages of @ccmode{}'s development.
408
409 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
410 @node Overview, Getting Started, Introduction, Top
411 @comment node-name, next, previous, up@cindex organization of the manual
412 @chapter Overview of the Manual
413 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
414
415 @noindent
416 The manual starts with several introductory chapters (including this
417 one).
418
419 @noindent
420 The next chunk of the manual describes the day to day @emph{use} of
421 @ccmode{} (as contrasted with how to customize it).
422
423 @itemize @bullet
424 @item
425 The chapter ``Commands'' describes in detail how to use (nearly) all
426 of @ccmode{}'s features. There are extensive cross-references from
427 here to the corresponding sections later in the manual which tell you
428 how to customize these features.
429
430 @item
431 ``Font Locking'' describes how ``syntax highlighting'' is applied to
432 your buffers. It is mainly background information and can be skipped
433 over at a first reading.
434 @end itemize
435
436 @noindent
437 The next chunk of the manual describes how to @emph{customize}
438 @ccmode{}. Typically, an overview of a topic is given at the chapter
439 level, then the sections and subsections describe the material in
440 increasing detail.
441
442 @itemize @bullet
443 @item
444 The chapter ``Configuration Basics'' tells you @emph{how} to write
445 customizations: whether in hooks, in styles, in both, or in neither,
446 depending on your needs. It describes the @ccmode{} style system and
447 lists the standard styles that @ccmode{} supplies.
448
449 @item
450 The next few chapters describe in detail how to customize the various
451 features of @ccmode{}.
452
453 @item
454 Finally, there is a sample @file{.emacs} fragment, which might help you
455 in creating your own customization.
456 @end itemize
457
458 @noindent
459 The manual ends with ``this and that'', things that don't fit cleanly
460 into any of the previous chunks.
461
462 @itemize @bullet
463 @item
464 Two chapters discuss the performance of @ccmode{} and known
465 bugs/limitations.
466
467 @item
468 The FAQ contains a list of common problems and questions.
469
470 @item
471 The next two chapters tell you how to get in touch with the @ccmode{}
472 project: whether for updating @ccmode{} or submitting bug reports.
473 @end itemize
474
475 @noindent
476 Finally, there are the customary indices.
477
478 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
479 @node Getting Started, Commands, Overview, Top
480 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
481 @chapter Getting Started
482 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
483
484 If you got this version of @ccmode{} with Emacs or XEmacs, it should
485 work just fine right out of the box. Note however that you might not
486 have the latest @ccmode{} release and might want to upgrade your copy
487 (see below).
488
489 You should probably start by skimming through the entire Commands chapter
490 (@pxref{Commands}) to get an overview of @ccmode{}'s capabilities.
491
492 After trying out some commands, you may dislike some aspects of
493 @ccmode{}'s default configuration. Here is an outline of how to
494 change some of the settings that newcomers to @ccmode{} most often
495 want to change:
496
497 @table @asis
498 @item c-basic-offset
499 This Lisp variable holds an integer, the number of columns @ccmode{}
500 indents nested code. To set this value to 6, customize
501 @code{c-basic-offset} or put this into your @file{.emacs}:
502
503 @example
504 (setq c-basic-offset 6)
505 @end example
506
507 @item The (indentation) style
508 The basic ``shape'' of indentation created by @ccmode{}---by default,
509 this is @code{gnu} style (except for Java and AWK buffers). A list of
510 the available styles and their descriptions can be found in
511 @ref{Built-in Styles}. A complete specification of the @ccmode{}
512 style system, including how to create your own style, can be found in
513 the chapter @ref{Styles}. To set your style to @code{linux}, either
514 customize @code{c-default-style} or put this into your @file{.emacs}:
515
516 @example
517 (setq c-default-style '((java-mode . "java")
518 (awk-mode . "awk")
519 (other . "linux")))
520 @end example
521
522 @item Electric Indentation
523 Normally, when you type ``punctuation'' characters such as @samp{;} or
524 @samp{@{}, @ccmode{} instantly reindents the current line. This can
525 be disconcerting until you get used to it. To disable @dfn{electric
526 indentation} in the current buffer, type @kbd{C-c C-l}. Type the same
527 thing to enable it again. To have electric indentation disabled by
528 default, put the following into your @file{.emacs} file@footnote{There
529 is no ``easy customization'' facility for making this change.}:
530
531 @example
532 (setq-default c-electric-flag nil)
533 @end example
534
535 @noindent
536 Details of this and other similar ``Minor Modes'' appear in the
537 section @ref{Minor Modes}.
538
539 @item Making the @key{RET} key indent the new line
540 The standard Emacs binding for @key{RET} just adds a new line. If you
541 want it to reindent the new line as well, rebind the key. Note that
542 the action of rebinding would fail if the pertinent keymap didn't yet
543 exist---we thus need to delay the action until after @ccmode{} has
544 been loaded. Put the following code into your @file{.emacs}:
545
546 @example
547 (defun my-make-CR-do-indent ()
548 (define-key c-mode-base-map "\C-m" 'c-context-line-break))
549 (add-hook 'c-initialization-hook 'my-make-CR-do-indent)
550 @end example
551
552 @noindent
553 This example demonstrates the use of a very powerful @ccmode{} (and
554 Emacs) facility, the hook. The use of @ccmode{}'s hooks is described
555 in @ref{CC Hooks}.
556 @end table
557
558 All these settings should occur in your @file{.emacs} @emph{before}
559 any @ccmode{} buffers get loaded---in particular, before any call of
560 @code{desktop-read}.
561
562 As you get to know the mode better, you may want to make more
563 ambitious changes to your configuration. For this, you should start
564 reading the chapter @ref{Config Basics}.
565
566 If you are upgrading an existing @ccmode{} installation, please see
567 the @file{README} file for installation details. In particular, if
568 you are going to be editing AWK files, @file{README} describes how to
569 configure your (X)Emacs so that @ccmode{} will supersede the obsolete
570 @code{awk-mode.el} which might have been supplied with your (X)Emacs.
571 @ccmode{} might not work with older versions of Emacs or XEmacs. See
572 the @ccmode{} release notes at @uref{http://cc-mode.sourceforge.net}
573 for the latest information on Emacs version and package compatibility
574 (@pxref{Updating CC Mode}).
575
576 @deffn Command c-version
577 @findex version (c-)
578 You can find out what version of @ccmode{} you are using by visiting a C
579 file and entering @kbd{M-x c-version RET}. You should see this message in
580 the echo area:
581
582 @example
583 Using CC Mode version 5.XX
584 @end example
585
586 @noindent
587 where @samp{XX} is the minor release number.
588 @end deffn
589
590 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
591 @node Commands, Font Locking, Getting Started, Top
592 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
593 @chapter Commands
594 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
595
596 This chapter specifies all of CC Mode's commands, and thus contains
597 nearly everything you need to know to @emph{use} @ccmode{} (as
598 contrasted with configuring it). @dfn{Commands} here means both
599 control key sequences and @dfn{electric keys}, these being characters
600 such as @samp{;} which, as well as inserting themselves into the
601 buffer, also do other things.
602
603 You might well want to review
604 @ifset XEMACS
605 @ref{Lists,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}},
606 @end ifset
607 @ifclear XEMACS
608 @ref{Moving by Parens,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}},
609 @end ifclear
610 which describes commands for moving around brace and parenthesis
611 structures.
612
613
614 @menu
615 * Indentation Commands::
616 * Comment Commands::
617 * Movement Commands::
618 * Filling and Breaking::
619 * Minor Modes::
620 * Electric Keys::
621 * Auto-newlines::
622 * Hungry WS Deletion::
623 * Subword Movement::
624 * Other Commands::
625 @end menu
626
627 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
628 @node Indentation Commands, Comment Commands, Commands, Commands
629 @comment node-name, next, previous,up
630 @section Indentation Commands
631 @cindex indentation
632 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
633
634 The following commands reindent C constructs. Note that when you
635 change your coding style, either interactively or through some other
636 means, your file does @emph{not} automatically get reindented. You
637 will need to execute one of the following commands to see the effects
638 of your changes.
639
640 @cindex GNU indent program
641 Also, variables like @code{c-hanging-*} and @code{c-cleanup-list}
642 (@pxref{Custom Auto-newlines}) only affect how on-the-fly code is
643 formatted. Changing the ``hanginess'' of a brace and then
644 reindenting, will not move the brace to a different line. For this,
645 you're better off getting an external program like GNU @code{indent},
646 which will rearrange brace location, amongst other things.
647
648 Preprocessor directives are handled as syntactic whitespace from other
649 code, i.e., they can be interspersed anywhere without affecting the
650 indentation of the surrounding code, just like comments.
651
652 The code inside macro definitions is, by default, still analyzed
653 syntactically so that you get relative indentation there just as you'd
654 get if the same code was outside a macro. However, since there is no
655 hint about the syntactic context, i.e., whether the macro expands to an
656 expression, to some statements, or perhaps to whole functions, the
657 syntactic recognition can be wrong. @ccmode{} manages to figure it
658 out correctly most of the time, though.
659
660 Some macros, when invoked, ''have their own semicolon''. To get the
661 next line indented correctly, rather than as a continuation line,
662 @xref{Macros with ;}.
663
664 Reindenting large sections of code can take a long time. When
665 @ccmode{} reindents a region of code, it is essentially equivalent to
666 hitting @key{TAB} on every line of the region.
667
668 These commands indent code:
669
670 @table @asis
671 @item @kbd{@key{TAB}} (@code{c-indent-command})
672 @kindex TAB
673 @findex c-indent-command
674 @findex indent-command (c-)
675 This command indents the current line. That is all you need to know
676 about it for normal use.
677
678 @code{c-indent-command} does different things, depending on the
679 setting of @code{c-syntactic-indentation} (@pxref{Indentation Engine
680 Basics}):
681
682 @itemize @bullet
683 @item
684 When it's non-@code{nil} (which it normally is), the command indents
685 the line according to its syntactic context. With a prefix argument
686 (@kbd{C-u @key{TAB}}), it will re-indent the entire
687 expression@footnote{this is only useful for a line starting with a
688 comment opener or an opening brace, parenthesis, or string quote.}
689 that begins at the line's left margin.
690
691 @item
692 When it's @code{nil}, the command indents the line by an extra
693 @code{c-basic-offset} columns. A prefix argument acts as a
694 multiplier. A bare prefix (@kbd{C-u @key{TAB}}) is equivalent to -1,
695 removing @code{c-basic-offset} columns from the indentation.
696 @end itemize
697
698 The precise behavior is modified by several variables: With
699 @code{c-tab-always-indent}, you can make @key{TAB} insert whitespace
700 in some circumstances---@code{c-insert-tab-function} then defines
701 precisely what sort of ``whitespace'' this will be. Set the standard
702 Emacs variable @code{indent-tabs-mode} to @code{t} if you want real
703 @samp{tab} characters to be used in the indentation, to @code{nil} if
704 you want only spaces. @xref{Just Spaces,,,@emacsman{},
705 @emacsmantitle{}}.
706
707 @defopt c-tab-always-indent
708 @vindex tab-always-indent (c-)
709 @cindex literal
710 This variable modifies how @key{TAB} operates.
711 @itemize @bullet
712 @item
713 When it is @code{t} (the default), @key{TAB} simply indents the
714 current line.
715 @item
716 When it is @code{nil}, @key{TAB} (re)indents the line only if point is
717 to the left of the first non-whitespace character on the line.
718 Otherwise it inserts some whitespace (a tab or an equivalent number of
719 spaces; see below) at point.
720 @item
721 With some other value, the line is reindented. Additionally, if point
722 is within a string or comment, some whitespace is inserted.
723 @end itemize
724 @end defopt
725
726 @defopt c-insert-tab-function
727 @vindex insert-tab-function (c-)
728 @findex tab-to-tab-stop
729 When ``some whitespace'' is inserted as described above, what actually
730 happens is that the function stored in @code{c-insert-tab-function} is
731 called. Normally, this is @code{insert-tab}, which inserts a real tab
732 character or the equivalent number of spaces (depending on
733 @code{indent-tabs-mode}). Some people, however, set
734 @code{c-insert-tab-function} to @code{tab-to-tab-stop} so as to get
735 hard tab stops when indenting.
736 @end defopt
737 @end table
738
739 @noindent
740 The kind of indentation the next five commands do depends on the
741 setting of @code{c-syntactic-indentation} (@pxref{Indentation Engine
742 Basics}):
743 @itemize @bullet
744 @item
745 when it is non-@code{nil} (the default), the commands indent lines
746 according to their syntactic context;
747 @item
748 when it is @code{nil}, they just indent each line the same amount as
749 the previous non-blank line. The commands that indent a region aren't
750 very useful in this case.
751 @end itemize
752
753 @table @asis
754 @item @kbd{C-M-q} (@code{c-indent-exp})
755 @kindex C-M-q
756 @findex c-indent-exp
757 @findex indent-exp (c-)
758 Indents an entire balanced brace or parenthesis expression. Note that
759 point must be on the opening brace or parenthesis of the expression
760 you want to indent.
761
762 @item @kbd{C-c C-q} (@code{c-indent-defun})
763 @kindex C-c C-q
764 @findex c-indent-defun
765 @findex indent-defun (c-)
766 Indents the entire top-level function, class or macro definition
767 encompassing point. It leaves point unchanged. This function can't be
768 used to reindent a nested brace construct, such as a nested class or
769 function, or a Java method. The top-level construct being reindented
770 must be complete, i.e., it must have both a beginning brace and an ending
771 brace.
772
773 @item @kbd{C-M-\} (@code{indent-region})
774 @kindex C-M-\
775 @findex indent-region
776 Indents an arbitrary region of code. This is a standard Emacs command,
777 tailored for C code in a @ccmode{} buffer. Note, of course, that point
778 and mark must delineate the region you want to indent.
779
780 @item @kbd{C-M-h} (@code{c-mark-function})
781 @kindex C-M-h
782 @findex c-mark-function
783 @findex mark-function (c-)
784 While not strictly an indentation command, this is useful for marking
785 the current top-level function or class definition as the current
786 region. As with @code{c-indent-defun}, this command operates on
787 top-level constructs, and can't be used to mark say, a Java method.
788 @end table
789
790 These variables are also useful when indenting code:
791
792 @defopt indent-tabs-mode
793 This is a standard Emacs variable that controls how line indentation
794 is composed. When it's non-@code{nil}, tabs can be used in a line's
795 indentation, otherwise only spaces are used.
796 @end defopt
797
798 @defopt c-progress-interval
799 @vindex progress-interval (c-)
800 When indenting large regions of code, this variable controls how often a
801 progress message is displayed. Set this variable to @code{nil} to
802 inhibit the progress messages, or set it to an integer which is how
803 often (in seconds) progress messages are to be displayed.
804 @end defopt
805
806 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
807 @node Comment Commands, Movement Commands, Indentation Commands, Commands
808 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
809 @section Comment Commands
810 @cindex comments (insertion of)
811 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
812
813 @table @asis
814 @item @kbd{C-c C-c} (@code{comment-region})
815 @kindex C-c C-c
816 @findex comment-region
817 This command comments out the lines that start in the region. With a
818 negative argument, it does the opposite: it deletes the comment
819 delimiters from these lines. @xref{Multi-Line Comments,,, emacs, GNU
820 Emacs Manual}, for fuller details. @code{comment-region} isn't
821 actually part of @ccmode{}; it is given a @ccmode{} binding for
822 convenience.
823
824 @item @kbd{M-;} (@code{comment-dwim} or @code{indent-for-comment} @footnote{The name of this command varies between (X)Emacs versions.})
825 @kindex M-;
826 @findex comment-dwim
827 @findex indent-for-comment
828 Insert a comment at the end of the current line, if none is there
829 already. Then reindent the comment according to @code{comment-column}
830 @ifclear XEMACS
831 (@pxref{Options for Comments,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual})
832 @end ifclear
833 @ifset XEMACS
834 (@pxref{Comments,,, xemacs, XEmacs User's Manual})
835 @end ifset
836 and the variables below. Finally, position the point after the
837 comment starter. @kbd{C-u M-;} kills any comment on the current line,
838 together with any whitespace before it. This is a standard Emacs
839 command, but @ccmode{} enhances it a bit with two variables:
840
841 @defopt c-indent-comment-alist
842 @vindex indent-comment-alist (c-)
843 @vindex comment-column
844 This style variable allows you to vary the column that @kbd{M-;} puts
845 the comment at, depending on what sort of code is on the line, and
846 possibly the indentation of any similar comment on the preceding line.
847 It is an association list that maps different types of lines to
848 actions describing how they should be handled. If a certain line type
849 isn't present on the list then the line is indented to the column
850 specified by @code{comment-column}.
851
852 See the documentation string for a full description of this
853 variable (use @kbd{C-h v c-indent-comment-alist}).
854 @end defopt
855
856 @defopt c-indent-comments-syntactically-p
857 @vindex indent-comments-syntactically-p (c-)
858 Normally, when this style variable is @code{nil}, @kbd{M-;} will
859 indent comment-only lines according to @code{c-indent-comment-alist},
860 just as it does with lines where other code precede the comments.
861 However, if you want it to act just like @key{TAB} for comment-only
862 lines you can get that by setting
863 @code{c-indent-comments-syntactically-p} to non-@code{nil}.
864
865 If @code{c-indent-comments-syntactically-p} is non-@code{nil} then
866 @code{c-indent-comment-alist} won't be consulted at all for comment-only
867 lines.
868 @end defopt
869 @end table
870
871 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
872 @node Movement Commands, Filling and Breaking, Comment Commands, Commands
873 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
874 @section Movement Commands
875 @cindex movement
876 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
877
878 @ccmode{} contains some useful commands for moving around in C code.
879
880 @table @asis
881 @item @kbd{C-M-a} (@code{c-beginning-of-defun})
882 @itemx @kbd{C-M-e} (@code{c-end-of-defun})
883 @findex c-beginning-of-defun
884 @findex c-end-of-defun
885 @vindex c-defun-tactic
886 @vindex defun-tactic (c-)
887
888 Move to the beginning or end of the current or next function. Other
889 constructs (such as a structs or classes) which have a brace block
890 also count as ``functions'' here. To move over several functions, you
891 can give these commands a repeat count.
892
893 The start of a function is at its header. The end of the function is
894 after its closing brace, or after the semicolon of a construct (such
895 as a @code{struct}) which doesn't end at the brace. These two
896 commands try to leave point at the beginning of a line near the actual
897 start or end of the function. This occasionally causes point not to
898 move at all.
899
900 By default, these commands will recognize functions contained within a
901 @dfn{declaration scope} such as a C++ @code{class} or @code{namespace}
902 construct, should the point start inside it. If @ccmode fails to find
903 function beginnings or ends inside the current declaration scope, it
904 will search the enclosing scopes. If you want @ccmode to recognize
905 functions only at the top level@footnote{this was @ccmode{}'s
906 behavior prior to version 5.32.}, set @code{c-defun-tactic} to
907 @code{t}.
908
909 These functions are analogous to the Emacs built-in commands
910 @code{beginning-of-defun} and @code{end-of-defun}, except they
911 eliminate the constraint that the top-level opening brace of the defun
912 must be in column zero. See @ref{Defuns,,,@emacsman{},
913 @emacsmantitle{}}, for more information.
914
915 @item @kbd{C-M-a} (AWK Mode) (@code{c-awk-beginning-of-defun})
916 @itemx @kbd{C-M-e} (AWK Mode) (@code{c-awk-end-of-defun})
917 @kindex C-M-a (AWK Mode)
918 @kindex C-M-e (AWK Mode)
919 @findex c-awk-beginning-of-defun
920 @findex awk-beginning-of-defun (c-)
921 @findex c-awk-end-of-defun
922 @findex awk-end-of-defun (c-)
923 Move to the beginning or end of the current or next AWK defun. These
924 commands can take prefix-arguments, their functionality being entirely
925 equivalent to @code{beginning-of-defun} and @code{end-of-defun}.
926
927 AWK Mode @dfn{defuns} are either pattern/action pairs (either of which
928 might be implicit) or user defined functions. Having the @samp{@{} and
929 @samp{@}} (if there are any) in column zero, as is suggested for some
930 modes, is neither necessary nor helpful in AWK mode.
931
932 @item @kbd{M-a} (@code{c-beginning-of-statement})
933 @itemx @kbd{M-e} (@code{c-end-of-statement})
934 @kindex M-a
935 @kindex M-e
936 @findex c-beginning-of-statement
937 @findex c-end-of-statement
938 @findex beginning-of-statement (c-)
939 @findex end-of-statement (c-)
940 Move to the beginning or end of the innermost C statement. If point
941 is already there, move to the next beginning or end of a statement,
942 even if that means moving into a block. (Use @kbd{C-M-b} or
943 @kbd{C-M-f} to move over a balanced block.) A prefix argument @var{n}
944 means move over @var{n} statements.
945
946 If point is within or next to a comment or a string which spans more
947 than one line, these commands move by sentences instead of statements.
948
949 When called from a program, these functions take three optional
950 arguments: the repetition count, a buffer position limit which is the
951 farthest back to search for the syntactic context, and a flag saying
952 whether to do sentence motion in or near comments and multiline
953 strings.
954
955 @item @kbd{C-c C-u} (@code{c-up-conditional})
956 @kindex C-c C-u
957 @findex c-up-conditional
958 @findex up-conditional (c-)
959 Move back to the containing preprocessor conditional, leaving the mark
960 behind. A prefix argument acts as a repeat count. With a negative
961 argument, move forward to the end of the containing preprocessor
962 conditional.
963
964 @samp{#elif} is treated like @samp{#else} followed by @samp{#if}, so the
965 function stops at them when going backward, but not when going
966 forward.
967
968 This key sequence is not bound in AWK Mode, which doesn't have
969 preprocessor statements.
970
971 @item @kbd{M-x c-up-conditional-with-else}
972 @findex c-up-conditional-with-else
973 @findex up-conditional-with-else (c-)
974 A variety of @code{c-up-conditional} that also stops at @samp{#else}
975 lines. Normally those lines are ignored.
976
977 @item @kbd{M-x c-down-conditional}
978 @findex c-down-conditional
979 @findex down-conditional (c-)
980 Move forward into the next nested preprocessor conditional, leaving
981 the mark behind. A prefix argument acts as a repeat count. With a
982 negative argument, move backward into the previous nested preprocessor
983 conditional.
984
985 @samp{#elif} is treated like @samp{#else} followed by @samp{#if}, so the
986 function stops at them when going forward, but not when going backward.
987
988 @item @kbd{M-x c-down-conditional-with-else}
989 @findex c-down-conditional-with-else
990 @findex down-conditional-with-else (c-)
991 A variety of @code{c-down-conditional} that also stops at @samp{#else}
992 lines. Normally those lines are ignored.
993
994 @item @kbd{C-c C-p} (@code{c-backward-conditional})
995 @itemx @kbd{C-c C-n} (@code{c-forward-conditional})
996 @kindex C-c C-p
997 @kindex C-c C-n
998 @findex c-backward-conditional
999 @findex c-forward-conditional
1000 @findex backward-conditional (c-)
1001 @findex forward-conditional (c-)
1002 Move backward or forward across a preprocessor conditional, leaving
1003 the mark behind. A prefix argument acts as a repeat count. With a
1004 negative argument, move in the opposite direction.
1005
1006 These key sequences are not bound in AWK Mode, which doesn't have
1007 preprocessor statements.
1008
1009 @item @kbd{M-x c-backward-into-nomenclature}
1010 @itemx @kbd{M-x c-forward-into-nomenclature}
1011 @findex c-backward-into-nomenclature
1012 @findex c-forward-into-nomenclature
1013 @findex backward-into-nomenclature (c-)
1014 @findex forward-into-nomenclature (c-)
1015 A popular programming style, especially for object-oriented languages
1016 such as C++ is to write symbols in a mixed case format, where the
1017 first letter of each word is capitalized, and not separated by
1018 underscores. E.g., @samp{SymbolsWithMixedCaseAndNoUnderlines}.
1019
1020 These commands move backward or forward to the beginning of the next
1021 capitalized word. With prefix argument @var{n}, move @var{n} times.
1022 If @var{n} is negative, move in the opposite direction.
1023
1024 Note that these two commands have been superseded by
1025 @code{subword-mode}, which you should use instead. @xref{Subword
1026 Movement}. They might be removed from a future release of @ccmode{}.
1027 @end table
1028
1029 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1030 @node Filling and Breaking, Minor Modes, Movement Commands, Commands
1031 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1032 @section Filling and Line Breaking Commands
1033 @cindex text filling
1034 @cindex line breaking
1035 @cindex comment handling
1036 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1037
1038 Since there's a lot of normal text in comments and string literals,
1039 @ccmode{} provides features to edit these like in text mode. The goal
1040 is to do it seamlessly, i.e., you can use auto fill mode, sentence and
1041 paragraph movement, paragraph filling, adaptive filling etc.@: wherever
1042 there's a piece of normal text without having to think much about it.
1043 @ccmode{} keeps the indentation, fixes suitable comment line prefixes,
1044 and so on.
1045
1046 You can configure the exact way comments get filled and broken, and
1047 where Emacs does auto-filling (see @pxref{Custom Filling and
1048 Breaking}). Typically, the style system (@pxref{Styles}) will have
1049 set this up for you, so you probably won't have to bother.
1050
1051 @findex auto-fill-mode
1052 @cindex Auto Fill mode
1053 @cindex paragraph filling
1054 Line breaks are by default handled (almost) the same regardless of
1055 whether they are made by auto fill mode (@pxref{Auto
1056 Fill,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}), by paragraph filling (e.g., with
1057 @kbd{M-q}), or explicitly with @kbd{M-j} or similar methods. In
1058 string literals, the new line gets the same indentation as the
1059 previous nonempty line.@footnote{You can change this default by
1060 setting the @code{string} syntactic symbol (@pxref{Syntactic Symbols}
1061 and @pxref{Customizing Indentation})}.
1062
1063 @table @asis
1064 @item @kbd{M-q} (@code{c-fill-paragraph})
1065 @kindex M-q
1066 @findex c-fill-paragraph
1067 @findex fill-paragraph (c-)
1068 @cindex Javadoc markup
1069 @cindex Pike autodoc markup
1070 This command fills multiline string literals and both block
1071 and line style comments. In Java buffers, the Javadoc markup words
1072 are recognized as paragraph starters. The line oriented Pike autodoc
1073 markup words are recognized in the same way in Pike mode.
1074
1075 The formatting of the starters (@code{/*}) and enders (@code{*/}) of
1076 block comments are kept as they were before the filling. I.e., if
1077 either the starter or ender were on a line of its own, then it stays
1078 on its own line; conversely, if the delimiter has comment text on its
1079 line, it keeps at least one word of that text with it on the line.
1080
1081 This command is the replacement for @code{fill-paragraph} in @ccmode{}
1082 buffers.
1083
1084 @item @kbd{M-j} (@code{c-indent-new-comment-line})
1085 @kindex M-j
1086 @findex c-indent-new-comment-line
1087 @findex indent-new-comment-line (c-)
1088 This breaks the current line at point and indents the new line. If
1089 point was in a comment, the new line gets the proper comment line
1090 prefix. If point was inside a macro, a backslash is inserted before
1091 the line break. It is the replacement for
1092 @code{indent-new-comment-line}.
1093
1094 @item @kbd{M-x c-context-line-break}
1095 @findex c-context-line-break
1096 @findex context-line-break (c-)
1097 Insert a line break suitable to the context: If the point is inside a
1098 comment, the new line gets the suitable indentation and comment line
1099 prefix like @code{c-indent-new-comment-line}. In normal code it's
1100 indented like @code{newline-and-indent} would do. In macros it acts
1101 like @code{newline-and-indent} but additionally inserts and optionally
1102 aligns the line ending backslash so that the macro remains unbroken.
1103 @xref{Custom Macros}, for details about the backslash alignment. In a
1104 string, a backslash is inserted only if the string is within a
1105 macro@footnote{In GCC, unescaped line breaks within strings are
1106 valid.}.
1107
1108 This function is not bound to a key by default, but it's intended to be
1109 used on the @kbd{RET} key. If you like the behavior of
1110 @code{newline-and-indent} on @kbd{RET}, you should consider switching to
1111 this function. @xref{Sample Init File}.
1112
1113 @item @kbd{M-x c-context-open-line}
1114 @findex c-context-open-line
1115 @findex context-open-line (c-)
1116 This is to @kbd{C-o} (@kbd{M-x open-line}) as
1117 @code{c-context-line-break} is to @kbd{RET}. I.e., it works just like
1118 @code{c-context-line-break} but leaves the point before the inserted
1119 line break.
1120 @end table
1121
1122
1123 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1124 @node Minor Modes, Electric Keys, Filling and Breaking, Commands
1125 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1126 @section Minor Modes
1127 @cindex Minor Modes
1128 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1129
1130 @ccmode{} contains several minor-mode-like features that you might
1131 find useful while writing new code or editing old code:
1132
1133 @table @asis
1134 @item electric mode
1135 When this is enabled, certain visible characters cause reformatting as
1136 they are typed. This is normally helpful, but can be a nuisance when
1137 editing chaotically formatted code. It can also be disconcerting,
1138 especially for users who are new to @ccmode{}.
1139 @item auto-newline mode
1140 This automatically inserts newlines where you'd probably want to type
1141 them yourself, e.g., after typing @samp{@}}s. Its action is suppressed
1142 when electric mode is disabled.
1143 @item hungry-delete mode
1144 This lets you delete a contiguous block of whitespace with a single
1145 key: for example, the newline and indentation just inserted by
1146 auto-newline when you want to back up and write a comment after the
1147 last statement.
1148 @item subword mode
1149 This mode makes basic word movement commands like @kbd{M-f}
1150 (@code{forward-word}) and @kbd{M-b} (@code{backward-word}) treat the
1151 parts of sillycapsed symbols as different words.
1152 E.g., @samp{NSGraphicsContext} is treated as three words @samp{NS},
1153 @samp{Graphics}, and @samp{Context}.
1154 @item syntactic-indentation mode
1155 When this is enabled (which it normally is), indentation commands such
1156 as @kbd{C-j} indent lines of code according to their syntactic
1157 structure. Otherwise, a line is simply indented to the same level as
1158 the previous one and @kbd{@key{TAB}} adjusts the indentation in steps
1159 of @code{c-basic-offset}.
1160 @end table
1161
1162 Full details on how these minor modes work are at @ref{Electric Keys},
1163 @ref{Auto-newlines}, @ref{Hungry WS Deletion}, @ref{Subword Movement},
1164 and @ref{Indentation Engine Basics}.
1165
1166 You can toggle each of these minor modes on and off, and you can
1167 configure @ccmode{} so that it starts up with your favorite
1168 combination of them (@pxref{Sample Init File}). By default, when
1169 you initialize a buffer, electric mode and syntactic-indentation mode
1170 are enabled but the other three modes are disabled.
1171
1172 @ccmode{} displays the current state of the first four of these minor
1173 modes on the modeline by appending letters to the major mode's name,
1174 one letter for each enabled minor mode: @samp{l} for electric mode,
1175 @samp{a} for auto-newline mode, @samp{h} for hungry delete mode, and
1176 @samp{w} for subword mode. If all these modes were enabled, you'd see
1177 @samp{C/lahw}@footnote{The @samp{C} would be replaced with the name of
1178 the language in question for the other languages @ccmode{} supports.}.
1179
1180 Here are the commands to toggle these modes:
1181
1182 @table @asis
1183 @item @kbd{C-c C-l} (@code{c-toggle-electric-state})
1184 @kindex C-c C-l
1185 @findex c-toggle-electric-state
1186 @findex toggle-electric-state (c-)
1187 Toggle electric minor mode. When the command turns the mode off, it
1188 also suppresses auto-newline mode.
1189
1190 @item @kbd{C-c C-a} (@code{c-toggle-auto-newline})
1191 @kindex C-c C-a
1192 @findex c-toggle-auto-newline
1193 @findex toggle-auto-newline (c-)
1194 Toggle auto-newline minor mode. When the command turns the mode on,
1195 it also enables electric minor mode.
1196
1197 @item @kbd{M-x c-toggle-hungry-state}@footnote{Prior to @ccmode{} 5.31, this command was bound to @kbd{C-c C-d}.}
1198 @findex c-toggle-hungry-state
1199 @findex toggle-hungry-state (c-)
1200 Toggle hungry-delete minor mode.
1201
1202 @item @kbd{M-x c-toggle-auto-hungry-state}@footnote{Prior to @ccmode{} 5.31, this command was bound to @kbd{C-c C-t}.}
1203 @findex c-toggle-auto-hungry-state
1204 @findex toggle-auto-hungry-state (c-)
1205 Toggle both auto-newline and hungry delete minor modes.
1206
1207 @item @kbd{C-c C-w} (@code{M-x subword-mode})
1208 @kindex C-c C-w
1209 @findex subword-mode
1210 Toggle subword mode.
1211
1212 @item @kbd{M-x c-toggle-syntactic-indentation}
1213 @findex c-toggle-syntactic-indentation
1214 @findex toggle-syntactic-indentation (c-)
1215 Toggle syntactic-indentation mode.
1216 @end table
1217
1218 Common to all the toggle functions above is that if they are called
1219 programmatically, they take an optional numerical argument. A
1220 positive value will turn on the minor mode (or both of them in the
1221 case of @code{c-toggle-auto-hungry-state}) and a negative value will
1222 turn it (or them) off.
1223
1224
1225 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1226 @node Electric Keys, Auto-newlines, Minor Modes, Commands
1227 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1228 @section Electric Keys and Keywords
1229 @cindex electric characters
1230 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1231
1232 Most punctuation keys provide @dfn{electric} behavior: as well as
1233 inserting themselves they perform some other action, such as
1234 reindenting the line. This reindentation saves you from having to
1235 reindent a line manually after typing, say, a @samp{@}}. A few
1236 keywords, such as @code{else}, also trigger electric action.
1237
1238 You can inhibit the electric behavior described here by disabling
1239 electric minor mode (@pxref{Minor Modes}).
1240
1241 Common to all these keys is that they only behave electrically when
1242 used in normal code (as contrasted with getting typed in a string
1243 literal or comment). Those which cause re-indentation do so only when
1244 @code{c-syntactic-indentation} has a non-@code{nil} value (which it
1245 does by default).
1246
1247 These keys and keywords are:
1248 @c ACM, 2004/8/24: c-electric-pound doesn't check c-s-i: this is more
1249 @c like a bug in the code than a bug in this document. It'll get
1250 @c fixed in the code sometime.
1251
1252 @table @kbd
1253 @item #
1254 @kindex #
1255 @findex c-electric-pound
1256 @findex electric-pound (c-)
1257 @vindex c-electric-pound-behavior
1258 @vindex electric-pound-behavior (c-)
1259 Pound (bound to @code{c-electric-pound}) is electric when typed as the
1260 first non-whitespace character on a line and not within a macro
1261 definition. In this case, the variable @code{c-electric-pound-behavior}
1262 is consulted for the electric behavior. This variable takes a list
1263 value, although the only element currently defined is @code{alignleft},
1264 which tells this command to force the @samp{#} character into column
1265 zero. This is useful for entering preprocessor macro definitions.
1266
1267 Pound is not electric in AWK buffers, where @samp{#} starts a comment,
1268 and is bound to @code{self-insert-command} like any typical printable
1269 character.
1270 @c ACM, 2004/8/24: Change this (and the code) to do AWK comment
1271 @c reindentation.
1272
1273 @item *
1274 @kindex *
1275 @itemx /
1276 @kindex /
1277 @findex c-electric-star
1278 @findex electric-star (c-)
1279 @findex c-electric-slash
1280 @findex electric-slash (c-)
1281 A star (bound to @code{c-electric-star}) or a slash
1282 (@code{c-electric-slash}) causes reindentation when you type it as the
1283 second component of a C style block comment opener (@samp{/*}) or a
1284 C++ line comment opener (@samp{//}) respectively, but only if the
1285 comment opener is the first thing on the line (i.e., there's only
1286 whitespace before it).
1287
1288 Additionally, you can configure @ccmode{} so that typing a slash at
1289 the start of a line within a block comment will terminate the
1290 comment. You don't need to have electric minor mode enabled to get
1291 this behavior. @xref{Clean-ups}.
1292
1293 In AWK mode, @samp{*} and @samp{/} do not delimit comments and are not
1294 electric.
1295
1296 @item <
1297 @kindex <
1298 @itemx >
1299 @kindex >
1300 @findex c-electric-lt-gt
1301 @findex electric-lt-gt (c-)
1302 A less-than or greater-than sign (bound to @code{c-electric-lt-gt}) is
1303 electric in two circumstances: when it is an angle bracket in a C++
1304 @samp{template} declaration (and similar constructs in other
1305 languages) and when it is the second of two @kbd{<} or @kbd{>}
1306 characters in a C++ style stream operator. In either case, the line
1307 is reindented. Angle brackets in C @samp{#include} directives are not
1308 electric.
1309
1310 @item (
1311 @kindex (
1312 @itemx )
1313 @kindex )
1314 @findex c-electric-paren
1315 @findex electric-paren (c-)
1316 The normal parenthesis characters @samp{(} and @samp{)} (bound to
1317 @code{c-electric-paren}) reindent the current line. This is useful
1318 for getting the closing parenthesis of an argument list aligned
1319 automatically.
1320
1321 You can also configure @ccmode{} to insert a space automatically
1322 between a function name and the @samp{(} you've just typed, and to
1323 remove it automatically after typing @samp{)}, should the argument
1324 list be empty. You don't need to have electric minor mode enabled to
1325 get these actions. @xref{Clean-ups}.
1326
1327 @item @{
1328 @kindex @{
1329 @itemx @}
1330 @kindex @}
1331 @findex c-electric-brace
1332 @findex electric-brace (c-)
1333 Typing a brace (bound to @code{c-electric-brace}) reindents the
1334 current line. Also, one or more newlines might be inserted if
1335 auto-newline minor mode is enabled. @xref{Auto-newlines}.
1336 Additionally, you can configure @ccmode{} to compact excess whitespace
1337 inserted by auto-newline mode in certain circumstances.
1338 @xref{Clean-ups}.
1339
1340 @item :
1341 @kindex :
1342 @findex c-electric-colon
1343 @findex electric-colon (c-)
1344 Typing a colon (bound to @code{c-electric-colon}) reindents the
1345 current line. Additionally, one or more newlines might be inserted if
1346 auto-newline minor mode is enabled. @xref{Auto-newlines}. If you
1347 type a second colon immediately after such an auto-newline, by default
1348 the whitespace between the two colons is removed, leaving a C++ scope
1349 operator. @xref{Clean-ups}.
1350
1351 If you prefer, you can insert @samp{::} in a single operation,
1352 avoiding all these spurious reindentations, newlines, and clean-ups.
1353 @xref{Other Commands}.
1354
1355 @item ;
1356 @kindex ;
1357 @itemx ,
1358 @kindex ,
1359 @findex c-electric-semi&comma
1360 @findex electric-semi&comma (c-)
1361 Typing a semicolon or comma (bound to @code{c-electric-semi&comma})
1362 reindents the current line. Also, a newline might be inserted if
1363 auto-newline minor mode is enabled. @xref{Auto-newlines}.
1364 Additionally, you can configure @ccmode{} so that when auto-newline
1365 has inserted whitespace after a @samp{@}}, it will be removed again
1366 when you type a semicolon or comma just after it. @xref{Clean-ups}.
1367
1368 @end table
1369
1370 @deffn Command c-electric-continued-statement
1371 @findex electric-continued-statement (c-)
1372
1373 Certain keywords are electric, causing reindentation when they are
1374 preceded only by whitespace on the line. The keywords are those that
1375 continue an earlier statement instead of starting a new one:
1376 @code{else}, @code{while}, @code{catch} (only in C++ and Java) and
1377 @code{finally} (only in Java).
1378
1379 An example:
1380
1381 @example
1382 @group
1383 for (i = 0; i < 17; i++)
1384 if (a[i])
1385 res += a[i]->offset;
1386 else
1387 @end group
1388 @end example
1389
1390 Here, the @code{else} should be indented like the preceding @code{if},
1391 since it continues that statement. @ccmode{} will automatically
1392 reindent it after the @code{else} has been typed in full, since only
1393 then is it possible to decide whether it's a new statement or a
1394 continuation of the preceding @code{if}.
1395
1396 @vindex abbrev-mode
1397 @findex abbrev-mode
1398 @cindex Abbrev mode
1399 @ccmode{} uses Abbrev mode (@pxref{Abbrevs,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}})
1400 to accomplish this. It's therefore turned on by default in all language
1401 modes except IDL mode, since CORBA IDL doesn't have any statements.
1402 @end deffn
1403
1404
1405 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1406 @node Auto-newlines, Hungry WS Deletion, Electric Keys, Commands
1407 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1408 @section Auto-newline Insertion
1409 @cindex auto-newline
1410 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1411
1412 When you have @dfn{Auto-newline minor mode} enabled (@pxref{Minor
1413 Modes}), @ccmode{} inserts newlines for you automatically (in certain
1414 syntactic contexts) when you type a left or right brace, a colon, a
1415 semicolon, or a comma. Sometimes a newline appears before the
1416 character you type, sometimes after it, sometimes both.
1417
1418 Auto-newline only triggers when the following conditions hold:
1419
1420 @itemize @bullet
1421 @item
1422 Auto-newline minor mode is enabled, as evidenced by the indicator
1423 @samp{a} after the mode name on the modeline (e.g., @samp{C/a} or
1424 @samp{C/la}).
1425
1426 @item
1427 The character was typed at the end of a line, or with only whitespace
1428 after it, and possibly a @samp{\} escaping the newline.
1429
1430 @item
1431 The character is not on its own line already. (This applies only to
1432 insertion of a newline @emph{before} the character.)
1433
1434 @item
1435 @cindex literal
1436 @cindex syntactic whitespace
1437 The character was not typed inside of a literal @footnote{A
1438 @dfn{literal} is defined as any comment, string, or preprocessor macro
1439 definition. These constructs are also known as @dfn{syntactic
1440 whitespace} since they are usually ignored when scanning C code.}.
1441
1442 @item
1443 No numeric argument was supplied to the command (i.e., it was typed as
1444 normal, with no @kbd{C-u} prefix).
1445 @end itemize
1446
1447 You can configure the precise circumstances in which newlines get
1448 inserted (see @pxref{Custom Auto-newlines}). Typically, the style
1449 system (@pxref{Styles}) will have set this up for you, so you probably
1450 won't have to bother.
1451
1452 Sometimes @ccmode{} inserts an auto-newline where you don't want one,
1453 such as after a @samp{@}} when you're about to type a @samp{;}.
1454 Hungry deletion can help here (@pxref{Hungry WS Deletion}), or you can
1455 activate an appropriate @dfn{clean-up}, which will remove the excess
1456 whitespace after you've typed the @samp{;}. See @ref{Clean-ups} for a
1457 full description. See also @ref{Electric Keys} for a summary of
1458 clean-ups listed by key.
1459
1460
1461 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1462 @node Hungry WS Deletion, Subword Movement, Auto-newlines, Commands
1463 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1464 @section Hungry Deletion of Whitespace
1465 @cindex hungry-deletion
1466 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1467
1468 If you want to delete an entire block of whitespace at point, you can
1469 use @dfn{hungry deletion}. This deletes all the contiguous whitespace
1470 either before point or after point in a single operation.
1471 ``Whitespace'' here includes tabs and newlines, but not comments or
1472 preprocessor commands. Hungry deletion can markedly cut down on the
1473 number of times you have to hit deletion keys when, for example,
1474 you've made a mistake on the preceding line and have already pressed
1475 @kbd{C-j}.
1476
1477 Hungry deletion is a simple feature that some people find extremely
1478 useful. In fact, you might find yourself wanting it in @strong{all}
1479 your editing modes!
1480
1481 Loosely speaking, in what follows, @dfn{@key{DEL}} means ``the
1482 backspace key'' and @dfn{@key{DELETE}} means ``the forward delete
1483 key''. This is discussed in more detail below.
1484
1485 There are two different ways you can use hungry deletion:
1486
1487 @table @asis
1488 @item Using @dfn{Hungry Delete Mode} with @kbd{@key{DEL}} and @kbd{C-d}
1489 Here you toggle Hungry Delete minor mode with @kbd{M-x
1490 c-toggle-hungry-state}@footnote{Prior to @ccmode{} 5.31, this command
1491 was bound to @kbd{C-c C-d}. @kbd{C-c C-d} is now the default binding
1492 for @code{c-hungry-delete-forward}.} (@pxref{Minor Modes}.) This
1493 makes @kbd{@key{DEL}} and @kbd{C-d} do backwards and forward hungry
1494 deletion.
1495
1496 @table @asis
1497 @item @kbd{@key{DEL}} (@code{c-electric-backspace})
1498 @kindex DEL
1499 @findex c-electric-backspace
1500 @findex electric-backspace (c-)
1501 This command is run by default when you hit the @kbd{DEL} key. When
1502 hungry delete mode is enabled, it deletes any amount of whitespace in
1503 the backwards direction. Otherwise, or when used with a prefix
1504 argument or in a literal (@pxref{Auto-newlines}), the command just
1505 deletes backwards in the usual way. (More precisely, it calls the
1506 function contained in the variable @code{c-backspace-function},
1507 passing it the prefix argument, if any.)
1508
1509 @item @code{c-backspace-function}
1510 @vindex c-backspace-function
1511 @vindex backspace-function (c-)
1512 @findex backward-delete-char-untabify
1513 Hook that gets called by @code{c-electric-backspace} when it doesn't
1514 do an ``electric'' deletion of the preceding whitespace. The default
1515 value is @code{backward-delete-char-untabify}
1516 (@pxref{Deletion,,,@lispref{}, @lispreftitle{}}, the function which
1517 deletes a single character.
1518
1519 @item @kbd{C-d} (@code{c-electric-delete-forward})
1520 @kindex C-d
1521 @findex c-electric-delete-forward
1522 @findex electric-delete-forward (c-)
1523 This function, which is bound to @kbd{C-d} by default, works just like
1524 @code{c-electric-backspace} but in the forward direction. When it
1525 doesn't do an ``electric'' deletion of the following whitespace, it
1526 just does @code{delete-char}, more or less. (Strictly speaking, it
1527 calls the function in @code{c-delete-function} with the prefix
1528 argument.)
1529
1530 @item @code{c-delete-function}
1531 @vindex c-delete-function
1532 @vindex delete-function (c-)
1533 @findex delete-char
1534 Hook that gets called by @code{c-electric-delete-forward} when it
1535 doesn't do an ``electric'' deletion of the following whitespace. The
1536 default value is @code{delete-char}.
1537 @end table
1538
1539 @item Using Distinct Bindings
1540 The other (newer and recommended) way to use hungry deletion is to
1541 perform @code{c-hungry-delete-backwards} and
1542 @code{c-hungry-delete-forward} directly through their key sequences
1543 rather than using the minor mode toggling.
1544
1545 @table @asis
1546 @item @kbd{C-c C-@key{DEL}}, or @kbd{C-c @key{DEL}} (@code{c-hungry-delete-backwards})@footnote{This command was formerly known as @code{c-hungry-backspace}.}
1547 @kindex C-c C-<backspace>
1548 @kindex C-c <backspace>
1549 @kindex C-c C-DEL
1550 @kindex C-c DEL
1551 @findex c-hungry-delete-backwards
1552 @findex hungry-delete-backwards (c-)
1553 Delete any amount of whitespace in the backwards direction (regardless
1554 whether hungry-delete mode is enabled or not). This command is bound
1555 to both @kbd{C-c C-@key{DEL}} and @kbd{C-c @key{DEL}}, since the more
1556 natural one, @kbd{C-c C-@key{DEL}}, is sometimes difficult to type at
1557 a character terminal.
1558
1559 @item @kbd{C-c C-d}, @kbd{C-c C-@key{DELETE}}, or @kbd{C-c @key{DELETE}} (@code{c-hungry-delete-forward})
1560 @kindex C-c C-d
1561 @kindex C-c C-<DELETE>
1562 @kindex C-c <DELETE>
1563 @findex c-hungry-delete-forward
1564 @findex hungry-delete-forward (c-)
1565 Delete any amount of whitespace in the forward direction (regardless
1566 whether hungry-delete mode is enabled or not). This command is bound
1567 to both @kbd{C-c C-@key{DELETE}} and @kbd{C-c @key{DELETE}} for the
1568 same reason as for @key{DEL} above.
1569 @end table
1570 @end table
1571
1572 @kindex <delete>
1573 @kindex <backspace>
1574
1575 When we talk about @kbd{@key{DEL}}, and @kbd{@key{DELETE}} above, we
1576 actually do so without connecting them to the physical keys commonly
1577 known as @key{Backspace} and @key{Delete}. The default bindings to
1578 those two keys depends on the flavor of (X)Emacs you are using.
1579
1580 @findex c-electric-delete
1581 @findex electric-delete (c-)
1582 @findex c-hungry-delete
1583 @findex hungry-delete (c-)
1584 @vindex delete-key-deletes-forward
1585 In XEmacs 20.3 and beyond, the @key{Backspace} key is bound to
1586 @code{c-electric-backspace} and the @key{Delete} key is bound to
1587 @code{c-electric-delete}. You control the direction it deletes in by
1588 setting the variable @code{delete-key-deletes-forward}, a standard
1589 XEmacs variable.
1590 @c This variable is encapsulated by XEmacs's (defsubst delete-forward-p ...).
1591 When this variable is non-@code{nil}, @code{c-electric-delete} will do
1592 forward deletion with @code{c-electric-delete-forward}, otherwise it
1593 does backward deletion with @code{c-electric-backspace}. Similarly,
1594 @kbd{C-c @key{Delete}} and @kbd{C-c C-@key{Delete}} are bound to
1595 @code{c-hungry-delete} which is controlled in the same way by
1596 @code{delete-key-deletes-forward}.
1597
1598 @findex normal-erase-is-backspace-mode
1599
1600 Emacs 21 and later automatically binds @key{Backspace} and
1601 @key{Delete} to @kbd{DEL} and @kbd{C-d} according to your environment,
1602 and @ccmode{} extends those bindings to @kbd{C-c C-@key{Backspace}}
1603 etc. If you need to change the bindings through
1604 @code{normal-erase-is-backspace-mode} then @ccmode{} will also adapt
1605 its extended bindings accordingly.
1606
1607 In earlier (X)Emacs versions, @ccmode{} doesn't bind either
1608 @key{Backspace} or @key{Delete} directly. Only the key codes
1609 @kbd{DEL} and @kbd{C-d} are bound, and it's up to the default bindings
1610 to map the physical keys to them. You might need to modify this
1611 yourself if the defaults are unsuitable.
1612
1613 Getting your @key{Backspace} and @key{Delete} keys properly set up can
1614 sometimes be tricky. The information in @ref{DEL Does Not
1615 Delete,,,emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}, might be helpful if you're having
1616 trouble with this in GNU Emacs.
1617
1618
1619 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1620 @node Subword Movement, Other Commands, Hungry WS Deletion, Commands
1621 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1622 @section Subword Movement and Editing
1623 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1624
1625 @cindex nomenclature
1626 @cindex subword
1627 In spite of the GNU Coding Standards, it is popular to name a symbol
1628 by mixing uppercase and lowercase letters, e.g., @samp{GtkWidget},
1629 @samp{EmacsFrameClass}, or @samp{NSGraphicsContext}. Here we call
1630 these mixed case symbols @dfn{nomenclatures}. Also, each capitalized
1631 (or completely uppercase) part of a nomenclature is called a
1632 @dfn{subword}. Here are some examples:
1633
1634 @multitable {@samp{NSGraphicsContext}} {@samp{NS}, @samp{Graphics}, and @samp{Context}}
1635 @c This could be converted to @headitem when we require Texinfo 4.7
1636 @iftex
1637 @item @b{Nomenclature}
1638 @tab @b{Subwords}
1639 @end iftex
1640 @ifnottex
1641 @item Nomenclature
1642 @tab Subwords
1643 @item ---------------------------------------------------------
1644 @end ifnottex
1645 @item @samp{GtkWindow}
1646 @tab @samp{Gtk} and @samp{Window}
1647 @item @samp{EmacsFrameClass}
1648 @tab @samp{Emacs}, @samp{Frame}, and @samp{Class}
1649 @item @samp{NSGraphicsContext}
1650 @tab @samp{NS}, @samp{Graphics}, and @samp{Context}
1651 @end multitable
1652
1653 The subword minor mode replaces the basic word oriented movement and
1654 editing commands with variants that recognize subwords in a
1655 nomenclature and treat them as separate words:
1656
1657 @findex c-forward-subword
1658 @findex forward-subword (c-)
1659 @findex c-backward-subword
1660 @findex backward-subword (c-)
1661 @findex c-mark-subword
1662 @findex mark-subword (c-)
1663 @findex c-kill-subword
1664 @findex kill-subword (c-)
1665 @findex c-backward-kill-subword
1666 @findex backward-kill-subword (c-)
1667 @findex c-transpose-subwords
1668 @findex transpose-subwords (c-)
1669 @findex c-capitalize-subword
1670 @findex capitalize-subword (c-)
1671 @findex c-upcase-subword
1672 @findex upcase-subword (c-)
1673 @findex c-downcase-subword
1674 @findex downcase-subword (c-)
1675 @multitable @columnfractions .20 .40 .40
1676 @c This could be converted to @headitem when we require Texinfo 4.7
1677 @iftex
1678 @item @b{Key} @tab @b{Word oriented command} @tab @b{Subword oriented command}
1679 @end iftex
1680 @ifnottex
1681 @item Key @tab Word oriented command @tab Subword oriented command
1682 @item ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1683 @end ifnottex
1684 @item @kbd{M-f} @tab @code{forward-word} @tab @code{c-forward-subword}
1685 @item @kbd{M-b} @tab @code{backward-word} @tab @code{c-backward-subword}
1686 @item @kbd{M-@@} @tab @code{mark-word} @tab @code{c-mark-subword}
1687 @item @kbd{M-d} @tab @code{kill-word} @tab @code{c-kill-subword}
1688 @item @kbd{M-DEL} @tab @code{backward-kill-word} @tab @code{c-backward-kill-subword}
1689 @item @kbd{M-t} @tab @code{transpose-words} @tab @code{c-transpose-subwords}
1690 @item @kbd{M-c} @tab @code{capitalize-word} @tab @code{c-capitalize-subword}
1691 @item @kbd{M-u} @tab @code{upcase-word} @tab @code{c-upcase-subword}
1692 @item @kbd{M-l} @tab @code{downcase-word} @tab @code{c-downcase-subword}
1693 @end multitable
1694
1695 Note that if you have changed the key bindings for the word oriented
1696 commands in your @file{.emacs} or a similar place, the keys you have
1697 configured are also used for the corresponding subword oriented
1698 commands.
1699
1700 Type @kbd{C-c C-w} to toggle subword mode on and off. To make the
1701 mode turn on automatically, put the following code in your
1702 @file{.emacs}:
1703
1704 @example
1705 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook
1706 (lambda () (subword-mode 1)))
1707 @end example
1708
1709 As a bonus, you can also use @code{subword-mode} in non-@ccmode{}
1710 buffers by typing @kbd{M-x subword-mode}.
1711
1712 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1713 @node Other Commands, , Subword Movement, Commands
1714 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1715 @section Other Commands
1716 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1717
1718 Here are the various other commands that didn't fit anywhere else:
1719
1720 @table @asis
1721 @item @kbd{C-c .} (@code{c-set-style})
1722 @kindex C-c .
1723 @findex c-set-style
1724 @findex set-style (c-)
1725 Switch to the specified style in the current buffer. Use like this:
1726
1727 @example
1728 @kbd{C-c . @var{style-name} @key{RET}}
1729 @end example
1730
1731 You can use the @key{TAB} in the normal way to do completion on the
1732 style name. Note that all style names are case insensitive, even the
1733 ones you define yourself.
1734
1735 Setting a style in this way does @emph{not} automatically reindent your
1736 file. For commands that you can use to view the effect of your changes,
1737 see @ref{Indentation Commands} and @ref{Filling and Breaking}.
1738
1739 For details of the @ccmode{} style system, see @ref{Styles}.
1740 @item @kbd{C-c :} (@code{c-scope-operator})
1741 @kindex C-c :
1742 @findex c-scope-operator
1743 @findex scope-operator (c-)
1744 In C++, it is also sometimes desirable to insert the double-colon scope
1745 operator without performing the electric behavior of colon insertion.
1746 @kbd{C-c :} does just this.
1747
1748 @item @kbd{C-c C-\} (@code{c-backslash-region})
1749 @kindex C-c C-\
1750 @findex c-backslash-region
1751 @findex backslash-region (c-)
1752 This function inserts and aligns or deletes end-of-line backslashes in
1753 the current region. These are typically used in multi-line macros.
1754
1755 With no prefix argument, it inserts any missing backslashes and aligns
1756 them according to the @code{c-backslash-column} and
1757 @code{c-backslash-max-column} variables. With a prefix argument, it
1758 deletes any backslashes.
1759
1760 The function does not modify blank lines at the start of the region. If
1761 the region ends at the start of a line, it always deletes the backslash
1762 (if any) at the end of the previous line.
1763
1764 To customize the precise workings of this command, @ref{Custom Macros}.
1765 @end table
1766
1767 @noindent
1768 The recommended line breaking function, @code{c-context-line-break}
1769 (@pxref{Filling and Breaking}), is especially nice if you edit
1770 multiline macros frequently. When used inside a macro, it
1771 automatically inserts and adjusts the mandatory backslash at the end
1772 of the line to keep the macro together, and it leaves the point at the
1773 right indentation column for the code. Thus you can write code inside
1774 macros almost exactly as you can elsewhere, without having to bother
1775 with the trailing backslashes.
1776
1777 @table @asis
1778 @item @kbd{C-c C-e} (@code{c-macro-expand})
1779 @kindex C-c C-e
1780 @findex c-macro-expand
1781 @findex macro-expand (c-)
1782 This command expands C, C++, Objective C or Pike macros in the region,
1783 using an appropriate external preprocessor program. Normally it
1784 displays its output in a temporary buffer, but if you give it a prefix
1785 arg (with @kbd{C-u C-c C-e}) it will overwrite the original region
1786 with the expansion.
1787
1788 The command does not work in any of the other modes, and the key
1789 sequence is not bound in these other modes.
1790
1791 @code{c-macro-expand} isn't actually part of @ccmode{}, even though it
1792 is bound to a @ccmode{} key sequence. If you need help setting it up
1793 or have other problems with it, you can either read its source code or
1794 ask for help in the standard (X)Emacs forums.
1795 @end table
1796
1797 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1798 @node Font Locking, Config Basics, Commands, Top
1799 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1800 @chapter Font Locking
1801 @cindex font locking
1802 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1803
1804 @cindex Font Lock mode
1805
1806 @ccmode{} provides font locking for its supported languages by
1807 supplying patterns for use with Font Lock mode. This means that you
1808 get distinct faces on the various syntactic parts such as comments,
1809 strings, keywords and types, which is very helpful in telling them
1810 apart at a glance and discovering syntactic errors. @xref{Font
1811 Lock,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}, for ways to enable font locking in
1812 @ccmode{} buffers.
1813
1814 @strong{Please note:} The font locking in AWK mode is currently not
1815 integrated with the rest of @ccmode{}. Only the last section of this
1816 chapter, @ref{AWK Mode Font Locking}, applies to AWK@. The other
1817 sections apply to the other languages.
1818
1819 @menu
1820 * Font Locking Preliminaries::
1821 * Faces::
1822 * Doc Comments::
1823 * AWK Mode Font Locking::
1824 @end menu
1825
1826
1827 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1828 @node Font Locking Preliminaries, Faces, Font Locking, Font Locking
1829 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1830 @section Font Locking Preliminaries
1831 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1832
1833 The font locking for most of the @ccmode{} languages were provided
1834 directly by the Font Lock package prior to version 5.30 of @ccmode{}.
1835 In the transition to @ccmode{} the patterns have been reworked
1836 completely and are applied uniformly across all the languages except AWK
1837 mode, just like the indentation rules (although each language still has
1838 some peculiarities of its own, of course). Since the languages
1839 previously had completely separate font locking patterns, this means
1840 that it's a bit different in most languages now.
1841
1842 The main goal for the font locking in @ccmode{} is accuracy, to provide
1843 a dependable aid in recognizing the various constructs. Some, like
1844 strings and comments, are easy to recognize while others, like
1845 declarations and types, can be very tricky. @ccmode{} can go to great
1846 lengths to recognize declarations and casts correctly, especially when
1847 the types aren't recognized by standard patterns. This is a fairly
1848 demanding analysis which can be slow on older hardware, and it can
1849 therefore be disabled by choosing a lower decoration level with the
1850 variable @code{font-lock-maximum-decoration} (@pxref{Font Lock,,,
1851 emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}).
1852
1853 @vindex font-lock-maximum-decoration
1854
1855 The decoration levels are used as follows:
1856
1857 @enumerate
1858 @comment 1
1859 @item
1860 Minimal font locking: Fontify only comments, strings and preprocessor
1861 directives (in the languages that use cpp).
1862
1863 @comment 2
1864 @item
1865 Fast font locking: In addition to level 1, fontify keywords, simple
1866 types and declarations that are easy to recognize. The variables
1867 @code{*-font-lock-extra-types} (where @samp{*} is the name of the
1868 language) are used to recognize types (see below). Documentation
1869 comments like Javadoc are fontified according to
1870 @code{c-doc-comment-style} (@pxref{Doc Comments}).
1871
1872 Use this if you think the font locking is too slow. It's the closest
1873 corresponding level to level 3 in the old font lock patterns.
1874
1875 @comment 3
1876 @item
1877 Accurate font locking: Like level 2 but uses a different approach that
1878 can recognize types and declarations much more accurately. The
1879 @code{*-font-lock-extra-types} variables are still used, but user
1880 defined types are recognized correctly anyway in most cases. Therefore
1881 those variables should be fairly restrictive and not contain patterns
1882 that are uncertain.
1883
1884 @cindex Lazy Lock mode
1885 @cindex Just-in-time Lock mode
1886
1887 This level is designed for fairly modern hardware and a font lock
1888 support mode like Lazy Lock or Just-in-time Lock mode that only
1889 fontifies the parts that are actually shown. Fontifying the whole
1890 buffer at once can easily get bothersomely slow even on contemporary
1891 hardware. @xref{Font Lock,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}.
1892 @end enumerate
1893
1894 @cindex user defined types
1895 @cindex types, user defined
1896
1897 Since user defined types are hard to recognize you can provide
1898 additional regexps to match those you use:
1899
1900 @defopt c-font-lock-extra-types
1901 @defoptx c++-font-lock-extra-types
1902 @defoptx objc-font-lock-extra-types
1903 @defoptx java-font-lock-extra-types
1904 @defoptx idl-font-lock-extra-types
1905 @defoptx pike-font-lock-extra-types
1906 For each language there's a variable @code{*-font-lock-extra-types},
1907 where @samp{*} stands for the language in question. It contains a list
1908 of regexps that matches identifiers that should be recognized as types,
1909 e.g., @samp{\\sw+_t} to recognize all identifiers ending with @samp{_t}
1910 as is customary in C code. Each regexp should not match more than a
1911 single identifier.
1912
1913 The default values contain regexps for many types in standard runtime
1914 libraries that are otherwise difficult to recognize, and patterns for
1915 standard type naming conventions like the @samp{_t} suffix in C and C++.
1916 Java, Objective-C and Pike have as a convention to start class names
1917 with capitals, so there are patterns for that in those languages.
1918
1919 Despite the names of these variables, they are not only used for
1920 fontification but in other places as well where @ccmode{} needs to
1921 recognize types.
1922 @end defopt
1923
1924
1925 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1926 @node Faces, Doc Comments, Font Locking Preliminaries, Font Locking
1927 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1928 @section Faces
1929 @cindex faces
1930 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1931
1932 @ccmode{} attempts to use the standard faces for programming languages
1933 in accordance with their intended purposes as far as possible. No extra
1934 faces are currently provided, with the exception of a replacement face
1935 @code{c-invalid-face} for emacsen that don't provide
1936 @code{font-lock-warning-face}.
1937
1938 @itemize @bullet
1939 @item
1940 @vindex font-lock-comment-face
1941 Normal comments are fontified in @code{font-lock-comment-face}.
1942
1943 @item
1944 @vindex font-lock-doc-face
1945 @vindex font-lock-doc-string-face
1946 @vindex font-lock-comment-face
1947 Comments that are recognized as documentation (@pxref{Doc Comments})
1948 get @code{font-lock-doc-face} (Emacs) or
1949 @code{font-lock-doc-string-face} (XEmacs) if those faces exist. If
1950 they don't then @code{font-lock-comment-face} is used.
1951
1952 @item
1953 @vindex font-lock-string-face
1954 String and character literals are fontified in
1955 @code{font-lock-string-face}.
1956
1957 @item
1958 @vindex font-lock-keyword-face
1959 Keywords are fontified with @code{font-lock-keyword-face}.
1960
1961 @item
1962 @vindex font-lock-function-name-face
1963 @code{font-lock-function-name-face} is used for function names in
1964 declarations and definitions, and classes in those contexts. It's also
1965 used for preprocessor defines with arguments.
1966
1967 @item
1968 @vindex font-lock-variable-name-face
1969 Variables in declarations and definitions, and other identifiers in such
1970 variable contexts, get @code{font-lock-variable-name-face}. It's also
1971 used for preprocessor defines without arguments.
1972
1973 @item
1974 @vindex font-lock-constant-face
1975 @vindex font-lock-reference-face
1976 Builtin constants are fontified in @code{font-lock-constant-face} if it
1977 exists, @code{font-lock-reference-face} otherwise. As opposed to the
1978 preceding two faces, this is used on the names in expressions, and it's
1979 not used in declarations, even if there happen to be a @samp{const} in
1980 them somewhere.
1981
1982 @item
1983 @vindex font-lock-type-face
1984 @code{font-lock-type-face} is put on types (both predefined and user
1985 defined) and classes in type contexts.
1986
1987 @item
1988 @vindex font-lock-constant-face
1989 @vindex font-lock-reference-face
1990 Label identifiers get @code{font-lock-constant-face} if it exists,
1991 @code{font-lock-reference-face} otherwise.
1992
1993 @item
1994 Name qualifiers and identifiers for scope constructs are fontified like
1995 labels.
1996
1997 @item
1998 Special markup inside documentation comments are also fontified like
1999 labels.
2000
2001 @item
2002 @vindex font-lock-preprocessor-face
2003 @vindex font-lock-builtin-face
2004 @vindex font-lock-reference-face
2005 Preprocessor directives get @code{font-lock-preprocessor-face} if it
2006 exists (i.e., XEmacs). In Emacs they get @code{font-lock-builtin-face}
2007 or @code{font-lock-reference-face}, for lack of a closer equivalent.
2008
2009 @item
2010 @vindex font-lock-warning-face
2011 @vindex c-invalid-face
2012 @vindex invalid-face (c-)
2013 Some kinds of syntactic errors are fontified with
2014 @code{font-lock-warning-face} in Emacs. In older XEmacs versions
2015 there's no corresponding standard face, so there a special
2016 @code{c-invalid-face} is used, which is defined to stand out sharply by
2017 default.
2018
2019 Note that it's not used for @samp{#error} or @samp{#warning} directives,
2020 since those aren't syntactic errors in themselves.
2021 @end itemize
2022
2023
2024 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2025 @node Doc Comments, AWK Mode Font Locking, Faces, Font Locking
2026 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2027 @section Documentation Comments
2028 @cindex documentation comments
2029 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2030
2031 There are various tools to supply documentation in the source as
2032 specially structured comments, e.g., the standard Javadoc tool in Java.
2033 @ccmode{} provides an extensible mechanism to fontify such comments and
2034 the special markup inside them.
2035
2036 @defopt c-doc-comment-style
2037 @vindex doc-comment-style (c-)
2038 This is a style variable that specifies which documentation comment
2039 style to recognize, e.g., @code{javadoc} for Javadoc comments.
2040
2041 The value may also be a list of styles, in which case all of them are
2042 recognized simultaneously (presumably with markup cues that don't
2043 conflict).
2044
2045 The value may also be an association list to specify different comment
2046 styles for different languages. The symbol for the major mode is then
2047 looked up in the alist, and the value of that element is interpreted as
2048 above if found. If it isn't found then the symbol @code{other} is looked up
2049 and its value is used instead.
2050
2051 The default value for @code{c-doc-comment-style} is
2052 @w{@code{((java-mode . javadoc) (pike-mode . autodoc) (c-mode . gtkdoc))}}.
2053
2054 Note that @ccmode{} uses this variable to set other variables that
2055 handle fontification etc. That's done at mode initialization or when
2056 you switch to a style which sets this variable. Thus, if you change it
2057 in some other way, e.g., interactively in a CC Mode buffer, you will need
2058 to do @kbd{M-x java-mode} (or whatever mode you're currently using) to
2059 reinitialize.
2060
2061 @findex c-setup-doc-comment-style
2062 @findex setup-doc-comment-style (c-)
2063 Note also that when @ccmode{} starts up, the other variables are
2064 modified before the mode hooks are run. If you change this variable in
2065 a mode hook, you'll have to call @code{c-setup-doc-comment-style}
2066 afterwards to redo that work.
2067 @end defopt
2068
2069 @ccmode{} currently provides handing of the following doc comment
2070 styles:
2071
2072 @table @code
2073 @item javadoc
2074 @cindex Javadoc markup
2075 Javadoc comments, the standard tool in Java.
2076
2077 @item autodoc
2078 @cindex Pike autodoc markup
2079 For Pike autodoc markup, the standard in Pike.
2080
2081 @item gtkdoc
2082 @cindex GtkDoc markup
2083 For GtkDoc markup, widely used in the Gnome community.
2084 @end table
2085
2086 The above is by no means complete. If you'd like to see support for
2087 other doc comment styles, please let us know (@pxref{Mailing Lists and
2088 Bug Reports}).
2089
2090 You can also write your own doc comment fontification support to use
2091 with @code{c-doc-comment-style}: Supply a variable or function
2092 @code{*-font-lock-keywords} where @samp{*} is the name you want to use
2093 in @code{c-doc-comment-style}. If it's a variable, it's prepended to
2094 @code{font-lock-keywords}. If it's a function, it's called at mode
2095 initialization and the result is prepended. For an example, see
2096 @code{javadoc-font-lock-keywords} in @file{cc-fonts.el}.
2097
2098 If you add support for another doc comment style, please consider
2099 contributing it: send a note to @email{bug-cc-mode@@gnu.org}.
2100
2101
2102 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2103 @node AWK Mode Font Locking, , Doc Comments, Font Locking
2104 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2105 @section AWK Mode Font Locking
2106 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2107
2108 The general appearance of font-locking in AWK mode is much like in any
2109 other programming mode. @xref{Faces for Font Lock,,,elisp, GNU Emacs
2110 Lisp Reference Manual}.
2111
2112 The following faces are, however, used in a non-standard fashion in
2113 AWK mode:
2114
2115 @table @asis
2116 @item @code{font-lock-variable-name-face}
2117 This face was intended for variable declarations. Since variables are
2118 not declared in AWK, this face is used instead for AWK system
2119 variables (such as @code{NF}) and ``Special File Names'' (such as
2120 @code{"/dev/stderr"}).
2121
2122 @item @code{font-lock-builtin-face} (Emacs)/@code{font-lock-preprocessor-face} (XEmacs)
2123 This face is normally used for preprocessor directives in @ccmode{}.
2124 There are no such things in AWK, so this face is used instead for
2125 standard functions (such as @code{match}).
2126
2127 @item @code{font-lock-string-face}
2128 As well as being used for strings, including localizable strings,
2129 (delimited by @samp{"} and @samp{_"}), this face is also used for AWK
2130 regular expressions (delimited by @samp{/}).
2131
2132 @item @code{font-lock-warning-face} (Emacs)/@code{c-invalid-face} (XEmacs)
2133 This face highlights the following syntactically invalid AWK
2134 constructs:
2135
2136 @itemize @bullet
2137 @item
2138 An unterminated string or regular expression. Here the opening
2139 delimiter (@samp{"} or @samp{/} or @samp{_"}) is displayed in
2140 @code{font-lock-warning-face}. This is most noticeable when typing in a
2141 new string/regular expression into a buffer, when the warning-face
2142 serves as a continual reminder to terminate the construct.
2143
2144 AWK mode fontifies unterminated strings/regular expressions
2145 differently from other modes: Only the text up to the end of the line
2146 is fontified as a string (escaped newlines being handled correctly),
2147 rather than the text up to the next string quote.
2148
2149 @item
2150 A space between the function name and opening parenthesis when calling
2151 a user function. The last character of the function name and the
2152 opening parenthesis are highlighted. This font-locking rule will
2153 spuriously highlight a valid concatenation expression where an
2154 identifier precedes a parenthesized expression. Unfortunately.
2155
2156 @item
2157 Whitespace following the @samp{\} in what otherwise looks like an
2158 escaped newline. The @samp{\} is highlighted.
2159 @end itemize
2160 @end table
2161
2162
2163 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2164 @node Config Basics, Custom Filling and Breaking, Font Locking, Top
2165 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2166 @chapter Configuration Basics
2167 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2168
2169 @cindex Emacs Initialization File
2170 @cindex Configuration
2171 You configure @ccmode{} by setting Lisp variables and calling (and
2172 perhaps writing) Lisp functions@footnote{DON'T PANIC!!! This isn't
2173 difficult.}, which is usually done by adding code to an Emacs
2174 initialization file. This file might be @file{site-start.el} or
2175 @file{.emacs} or @file{init.el} or @file{default.el} or perhaps some
2176 other file. @xref{Init File,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}. For
2177 the sake of conciseness, we just call this file ``your @file{.emacs}''
2178 throughout the rest of the manual.
2179
2180 Several of these variables (currently 16), are known collectively as
2181 @dfn{style variables}. @ccmode{} provides a special mechanism, known
2182 as @dfn{styles} to make it easier to set these variables as a group,
2183 to ``inherit'' settings from one style into another, and so on. Style
2184 variables remain ordinary Lisp variables, whose values can be read and
2185 changed independently of the style system. @xref{Style Variables}.
2186
2187 There are several ways you can write the code, depending on the
2188 precise effect you want---they are described further down on this page.
2189 If you are new to @ccmode{}, we suggest you begin with the simplest
2190 method, ``Top-level commands or the customization interface''.
2191
2192 If you make conflicting settings in several of these ways, the way
2193 that takes precedence is the one that appears latest in this list:
2194 @itemize @w{}
2195 @item
2196 @table @asis
2197 @item Style
2198 @itemx File Style@footnote{In earlier versions of @ccmode{}, a File Style setting took precedence over any other setting apart from a File Local Variable setting.}
2199 @itemx Top-level command or ``customization interface''
2200 @itemx Hook
2201 @itemx File Local Variable setting
2202 @end table
2203 @end itemize
2204
2205 Here is a summary of the different ways of writing your configuration
2206 settings:
2207
2208 @table @asis
2209 @item Top-level commands or the ``customization interface''
2210 Most simply, you can write @code{setq} and similar commands at the top
2211 level of your @file{.emacs} file. When you load a @ccmode{} buffer,
2212 it initializes its configuration from these global values (at least,
2213 for those settings you have given values to), so it makes sense to
2214 have these @code{setq} commands run @emph{before} @ccmode{} is first
2215 initialized---in particular, before any call to @code{desktop-read}
2216 (@pxref{Saving Emacs Sessions,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}). For
2217 example, you might set c-basic-offset thus:
2218
2219 @example
2220 (setq c-basic-offset 4)
2221 @end example
2222
2223 You can use the more user friendly Customization interface instead,
2224 but this manual does not cover in detail how that works. To do this,
2225 start by typing @kbd{M-x customize-group @key{RET} c @key{RET}}.
2226 @xref{Easy Customization,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}.
2227 @c The following note really belongs in the Emacs manual.
2228 Emacs normally writes the customizations at the end of your
2229 @file{.emacs} file. If you use @code{desktop-read}, you should edit
2230 your @file{.emacs} to place the call to @code{desktop-read} @emph{after}
2231 the customizations.
2232
2233 The first initialization of @ccmode{} puts a snapshot of the
2234 configuration settings into the special style @code{user}.
2235 @xref{Built-in Styles}.
2236
2237 For basic use of Emacs, either of these ways of configuring is
2238 adequate. However, the settings are then the same in all @ccmode{}
2239 buffers and it can be clumsy to communicate them between programmers.
2240 For more flexibility, you'll want to use one (or both) of @ccmode{}'s
2241 more sophisticated facilities, hooks and styles.
2242
2243 @item Hooks
2244 An Emacs @dfn{hook} is a place to put Lisp functions that you want
2245 Emacs to execute later in specific circumstances.
2246 @xref{Hooks,,,@lispref{}, @lispreftitle{}}. @ccmode{} supplies a main
2247 hook and a language-specific hook for each language it supports; any
2248 functions you put onto these hooks get executed as the last part of a
2249 buffer's initialization. Typically you put most of your customization
2250 within the main hook, and use the language-specific hooks to vary the
2251 customization settings between language modes. For example, if you
2252 wanted different (non-standard) values of @code{c-basic-offset} in C
2253 Mode and Java Mode buffers, you could do it like this:
2254
2255 @example
2256 @group
2257 (defun my-c-mode-hook ()
2258 (setq c-basic-offset 3))
2259 (add-hook 'c-mode-hook 'my-c-mode-hook)
2260
2261 (defun my-java-mode-hook ()
2262 (setq c-basic-offset 6))
2263 (add-hook 'java-mode-hook 'my-java-mode-hook)
2264 @end group
2265 @end example
2266
2267 See @ref{CC Hooks} for more details on the use of @ccmode{} hooks.
2268
2269 @item Styles
2270 A @ccmode{} @dfn{style} is a coherent collection of customizations
2271 with a name. At any time, exactly one style is active in each
2272 @ccmode{} buffer, either the one you have selected or a default.
2273 @ccmode{} is delivered with several existing styles. Additionally,
2274 you can create your own styles, possibly based on these existing
2275 styles. If you worked in a programming team called the ``Free
2276 Group'', which had its own coding standards, you might well have this
2277 in your @file{.emacs} file:
2278
2279 @example
2280 (setq c-default-style '((java-mode . "java")
2281 (awk-mode . "awk")
2282 (other . "free-group-style")))
2283 @end example
2284
2285 See @ref{Styles} for fuller details on using @ccmode{} styles and how
2286 to create them.
2287
2288 @item File Local Variable setting
2289 A @dfn{file local variable setting} is a setting which applies to an
2290 individual source file. You put this in a @dfn{local variables list},
2291 a special block at the end of the source file (@pxref{Specifying File
2292 Variables,,,@emacsman{}}).
2293
2294 @item File Styles
2295 A @dfn{file style} is a rarely used variant of the ``style'' mechanism
2296 described above, which applies to an individual source file.
2297 @xref{File Styles}. You use this by setting certain special variables
2298 in a local variables list (@pxref{Specifying File
2299 Variables,,,@emacsman{}}).
2300
2301 @item Hooks with Styles
2302 For ultimate flexibility, you can use hooks and styles together. For
2303 example, if your team were developing a product which required a
2304 Linux driver, you'd probably want to use the ``linux'' style for the
2305 driver, and your own team's style for the rest of the code. You
2306 could achieve this with code like this in your @file{.emacs}:
2307
2308 @example
2309 @group
2310 (defun my-c-mode-hook ()
2311 (c-set-style
2312 (if (and (buffer-file-name)
2313 (string-match "/usr/src/linux" (buffer-file-name)))
2314 "linux"
2315 "free-group-style")))
2316 (add-hook 'c-mode-hook 'my-c-mode-hook)
2317 @end group
2318 @end example
2319
2320 In a programming team, a hook is a also a good place for each member
2321 to put his own personal preferences. For example, you might be the
2322 only person in your team who likes Auto-newline minor mode. You could
2323 have it enabled by default by placing the following in your
2324 @file{.emacs}:
2325
2326 @example
2327 @group
2328 (defun my-turn-on-auto-newline ()
2329 (c-toggle-auto-newline 1))
2330 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook 'my-turn-on-auto-newline)
2331 @end group
2332 @end example
2333 @end table
2334
2335 @menu
2336 * CC Hooks::
2337 * Style Variables::
2338 * Styles::
2339 @end menu
2340
2341 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2342 @node CC Hooks, Style Variables, Config Basics, Config Basics
2343 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2344 @section Hooks
2345 @cindex mode hooks
2346 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2347 @c The node name is "CC Hooks" rather than "Hooks" because of a bug in
2348 @c some older versions of Info, e.g., the info.el in GNU Emacs 21.3.
2349 @c If you go to "Config Basics" and hit <CR> on the xref to "CC
2350 @c Hooks" the function Info-follow-reference searches for "*Note: CC
2351 @c Hooks" from the beginning of the page. If this node were instead
2352 @c named "Hooks", that search would spuriously find "*Note:
2353 @c Hooks(elisp)" and go to the wrong node.
2354
2355 @ccmode{} provides several hooks that you can use to customize the
2356 mode for your coding style. The main hook is
2357 @code{c-mode-common-hook}; typically, you'll put the bulk of your
2358 customizations here. In addition, each language mode has its own
2359 hook, allowing you to fine tune your settings individually for the
2360 different @ccmode{} languages, and there is a package initialization
2361 hook. Finally, there is @code{c-special-indent-hook}, which enables
2362 you to solve anomalous indentation problems. It is described in
2363 @ref{Other Indentation}, not here. All these hooks adhere to the
2364 standard Emacs conventions.
2365
2366 When you open a buffer, @ccmode{} first initializes it with the
2367 currently active style (@pxref{Styles}). Then it calls
2368 @code{c-mode-common-hook}, and finally it calls the language-specific
2369 hook. Thus, any style settings done in these hooks will override
2370 those set by @code{c-default-style}.
2371
2372 @defvar c-initialization-hook
2373 @vindex initialization-hook (c-)
2374 Hook run only once per Emacs session, when @ccmode{} is initialized.
2375 This is a good place to change key bindings (or add new ones) in any
2376 of the @ccmode{} key maps. @xref{Sample Init File}.
2377 @end defvar
2378
2379 @defvar c-mode-common-hook
2380 @vindex mode-common-hook (c-)
2381 Common hook across all languages. It's run immediately before the
2382 language specific hook.
2383 @end defvar
2384
2385 @defvar c-mode-hook
2386 @defvarx c++-mode-hook
2387 @defvarx objc-mode-hook
2388 @defvarx java-mode-hook
2389 @defvarx idl-mode-hook
2390 @defvarx pike-mode-hook
2391 @defvarx awk-mode-hook
2392 The language specific mode hooks. The appropriate one is run as the
2393 last thing when you enter that language mode.
2394 @end defvar
2395
2396 Although these hooks are variables defined in @ccmode{}, you can give
2397 them values before @ccmode{}'s code is loaded---indeed, this is the
2398 only way to use @code{c-initialization-hook}. Their values aren't
2399 overwritten when @ccmode{} gets loaded.
2400
2401 Here's a simplified example of what you can add to your @file{.emacs}
2402 file to do things whenever any @ccmode{} language is edited. See the
2403 Emacs manuals for more information on customizing Emacs via hooks.
2404 @xref{Sample Init File}, for a more complete sample @file{.emacs}
2405 file.
2406
2407 @example
2408 (defun my-c-mode-common-hook ()
2409 ;; my customizations for all of c-mode and related modes
2410 (no-case-fold-search)
2411 )
2412 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook 'my-c-mode-common-hook)
2413 @end example
2414
2415 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2416 @node Style Variables, Styles, CC Hooks, Config Basics
2417 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2418 @section Style Variables
2419 @cindex styles
2420 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2421
2422 @cindex style variables
2423 The variables that @ccmode{}'s style system control are called
2424 @dfn{style variables}. Note that style variables are ordinary Lisp
2425 variables, which the style system initializes; you can change their
2426 values at any time (e.g., in a hook function). The style system can
2427 also set other variables, to some extent. @xref{Styles}.
2428
2429 @dfn{Style variables} are handled specially in several ways:
2430
2431 @itemize @bullet
2432 @item
2433 Style variables are by default buffer-local variables. However, they
2434 can instead be made global by setting
2435 @code{c-style-variables-are-local-p} to @code{nil} before @ccmode{} is
2436 initialized.
2437
2438 @item
2439 @vindex c-old-style-variable-behavior
2440 @vindex old-style-variable-behavior (c-)
2441 The default global binding of any style variable (with two exceptions
2442 - see below) is the special symbol @code{set-from-style}. When the
2443 style system initializes a buffer-local copy of a style variable for a
2444 @ccmode{} buffer, if its global binding is still that symbol then it
2445 will be set from the current style. Otherwise it will retain its
2446 global default@footnote{This is a big change from versions of
2447 @ccmode{} earlier than 5.26, where such settings would get overridden
2448 by the style system unless special precautions were taken. That was
2449 changed since it was counterintuitive and confusing, especially to
2450 novice users. If your configuration depends on the old overriding
2451 behavior, you can set the variable
2452 @code{c-old-style-variable-behavior} to non-@code{nil}.}. This
2453 ``otherwise'' happens, for example, when you've set the variable with
2454 @code{setq} at the top level of your @file{.emacs} (@pxref{Config
2455 Basics}).
2456
2457 @item
2458 The style variable @code{c-offsets-alist} (@pxref{c-offsets-alist}) is
2459 an association list with an element for each syntactic symbol. It's
2460 handled a little differently from the other style variables. It's
2461 default global binding is the empty list @code{nil}, rather than
2462 @code{set-from-style}. Before the style system is initialized, you
2463 can add individual elements to @code{c-offsets-alist} by calling
2464 @code{c-set-offset} (@pxref{c-offsets-alist}) just like you would set
2465 other style variables with @code{setq}. Those elements will then
2466 prevail when the style system later initializes a buffer-local copy of
2467 @code{c-offsets-alist}.
2468
2469 @item
2470 The style variable @code{c-special-indent-hook} is also handled in a
2471 special way. Styles can only add functions to this hook, not remove
2472 them, so any global settings you put on it are always
2473 preserved@footnote{This did not change in version 5.26.}. The value
2474 you give this variable in a style definition can be either a function
2475 or a list of functions.
2476
2477 @item
2478 The global bindings of the style variables get captured in the special
2479 @code{user} style when the style system is first initialized.
2480 @xref{Built-in Styles}, for details.
2481 @end itemize
2482
2483 The style variables are:@*
2484 @code{c-indent-comment-alist},
2485 @code{c-indent-comments-syntactically-p} (@pxref{Indentation
2486 Commands});@*
2487 @code{c-doc-comment-style} (@pxref{Doc Comments});@*
2488 @code{c-block-comment-prefix}, @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp}
2489 (@pxref{Custom Filling and Breaking});@*
2490 @code{c-hanging-braces-alist} (@pxref{Hanging Braces});@*
2491 @code{c-hanging-colons-alist} (@pxref{Hanging Colons});@*
2492 @code{c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria} (@pxref{Hanging Semicolons and
2493 Commas});@*
2494 @code{c-cleanup-list} (@pxref{Clean-ups});@*
2495 @code{c-basic-offset} (@pxref{Customizing Indentation});@*
2496 @code{c-offsets-alist} (@pxref{c-offsets-alist});@*
2497 @code{c-comment-only-line-offset} (@pxref{Comment Line-Up});@*
2498 @code{c-special-indent-hook}, @code{c-label-minimum-indentation}
2499 (@pxref{Other Indentation});@*
2500 @code{c-backslash-column}, @code{c-backslash-max-column}
2501 (@pxref{Custom Macros}).
2502
2503 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2504 @node Styles, , Style Variables, Config Basics
2505 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2506 @section Styles
2507 @cindex styles
2508 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2509
2510 By @dfn{style} we mean the layout of the code---things like how many
2511 columns to indent a block of code, whether an opening brace gets
2512 indented to the level of the code it encloses, or of the construct
2513 that introduces it, or ``hangs'' at the end of a line.
2514
2515 Most people only need to edit code formatted in just a few well-defined
2516 and consistent styles. For example, their organization might impose a
2517 ``blessed'' style that all its programmers must conform to. Similarly,
2518 people who work on GNU software will have to use the GNU coding style.
2519 Some shops are more lenient, allowing a variety of coding styles, and as
2520 programmers come and go, there could be a number of styles in use. For
2521 this reason, @ccmode{} makes it convenient for you to set up logical
2522 groupings of customizations called @dfn{styles}, associate a single name
2523 for any particular style, and pretty easily start editing new or
2524 existing code using these styles.
2525
2526 As an alternative to writing a style definition yourself, you can have
2527 @ccmode{} @dfn{guess} (at least part of) your style by looking at an
2528 already formatted piece of your code, @ref{Guessing the Style}.
2529
2530 @menu
2531 * Built-in Styles::
2532 * Choosing a Style::
2533 * Adding Styles::
2534 * Guessing the Style::
2535 * File Styles::
2536 @end menu
2537
2538 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2539 @node Built-in Styles, Choosing a Style, Styles, Styles
2540 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2541 @subsection Built-in Styles
2542 @cindex styles, built-in
2543 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2544
2545 If you're lucky, one of @ccmode{}'s built-in styles might be just
2546 what you're looking for. These are:
2547
2548 @table @code
2549 @item gnu
2550 @cindex GNU style
2551 Coding style blessed by the Free Software Foundation
2552 for C code in GNU programs.
2553
2554 @item k&r
2555 @cindex K&R style
2556 The classic Kernighan and Ritchie style for C code.
2557
2558 @item bsd
2559 @cindex BSD style
2560 Also known as ``Allman style'' after Eric Allman.
2561
2562 @item whitesmith
2563 @cindex Whitesmith style
2564 Popularized by the examples that came with Whitesmiths C, an early
2565 commercial C compiler.
2566
2567 @item stroustrup
2568 @cindex Stroustrup style
2569 The classic Stroustrup style for C++ code.
2570
2571 @item ellemtel
2572 @cindex Ellemtel style
2573 Popular C++ coding standards as defined by ``Programming in C++, Rules
2574 and Recommendations,'' Erik Nyquist and Mats Henricson,
2575 Ellemtel@footnote{This document is available at
2576 @uref{http://www.doc.ic.ac.uk/lab/cplus/c++.rules/} among other
2577 places.}.
2578 @c N.B. This URL was still valid at 2005/8/28 (ACM).
2579
2580 @item linux
2581 @cindex Linux style
2582 C coding standard for Linux (the kernel).
2583
2584 @item python
2585 @cindex Python style
2586 C coding standard for Python extension modules@footnote{Python is a
2587 high level scripting language with a C/C++ foreign function interface.
2588 For more information, see @uref{http://www.python.org/}.}.
2589
2590 @item java
2591 @cindex Java style
2592 The style for editing Java code. Note that the default
2593 value for @code{c-default-style} installs this style when you enter
2594 @code{java-mode}.
2595
2596 @item awk
2597 @cindex AWK style
2598 The style for editing AWK code. Note that the default value for
2599 @code{c-default-style} installs this style when you enter
2600 @code{awk-mode}.
2601
2602 @item user
2603 @cindex User style
2604 This is a special style created by you. It consists of the factory
2605 defaults for all the style variables as modified by the customizations
2606 you do either with the Customization interface or by writing
2607 @code{setq}s and @code{c-set-offset}s at the top level of your
2608 @file{.emacs} file (@pxref{Config Basics}). The style system creates
2609 this style as part of its initialization and doesn't modify it
2610 afterwards.
2611 @end table
2612
2613
2614 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2615 @node Choosing a Style, Adding Styles, Built-in Styles, Styles
2616 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2617 @subsection Choosing a Style
2618 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2619
2620 When you create a new buffer, its style will be set from
2621 @code{c-default-style}. The factory default is the style @code{gnu},
2622 except in Java and AWK modes where it's @code{java} and @code{awk}.
2623
2624 Remember that if you set a style variable with the Customization
2625 interface or at the top level of your @file{.emacs} file before the
2626 style system is initialized (@pxref{Config Basics}), this setting will
2627 override the one that the style system would have given the variable.
2628
2629 To set a buffer's style interactively, use the command @kbd{C-c .}
2630 (@pxref{Other Commands}). To set it from a file's local variable
2631 list, @ref{File Styles}.
2632
2633 @defopt c-default-style
2634 @vindex default-style (c-)
2635 This variable specifies which style to install by default in new
2636 buffers. It takes either a style name string, or an association list
2637 of major mode symbols to style names:
2638
2639 @enumerate
2640 @item
2641 When @code{c-default-style} is a string, it must be an existing style
2642 name. This style is then used for all modes.
2643
2644 @item
2645 When @code{c-default-style} is an association list, the mode language
2646 is looked up to find a style name string.
2647
2648 @item
2649 If @code{c-default-style} is an association list where the mode
2650 language mode isn't found then the special symbol @samp{other} is
2651 looked up. If it's found then the associated style is used.
2652
2653 @item
2654 If @samp{other} is not found then the @samp{gnu} style is used.
2655 @end enumerate
2656
2657 In all cases, the style described in @code{c-default-style} is installed
2658 @emph{before} the language hooks are run, so you can always override
2659 this setting by including an explicit call to @code{c-set-style} in your
2660 language mode hook, or in @code{c-mode-common-hook}.
2661
2662 The standard value of @code{c-default-style} is @w{@code{((java-mode
2663 . "java") (awk-mode . "awk") (other . "gnu"))}}.
2664 @end defopt
2665
2666 @defvar c-indentation-style
2667 @vindex indentation-style (c-)
2668 This variable always contains the buffer's current style name, as a
2669 string.
2670 @end defvar
2671
2672 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2673 @node Adding Styles, Guessing the Style, Choosing a Style, Styles
2674 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2675 @subsection Adding and Amending Styles
2676 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2677
2678 If none of the built-in styles is appropriate, you'll probably want to
2679 create a new @dfn{style definition}, possibly based on an existing
2680 style. To do this, put the new style's settings into a list with the
2681 following format; the list can then be passed as an argument to the
2682 function @code{c-add-style}. You can see an example of a style
2683 definition in @ref{Sample Init File}.
2684
2685 @cindex style definition
2686 @c @defvr {List} style definition
2687 @table @asis
2688 @item Structure of a Style Definition List
2689 ([@var{base-style}] [(@var{variable} . @var{value}) @dots{}])
2690
2691 Optional @var{base-style}, if present, must be a string which is the
2692 name of the @dfn{base style} from which this style inherits. At most
2693 one @var{base-style} is allowed in a style definition. If
2694 @var{base-style} is not specified, the style inherits from the table
2695 of factory default values@footnote{This table is stored internally in
2696 the variable c-fallback-style.} instead. All styles eventually
2697 inherit from this internal table. Style loops generate errors. The
2698 list of pre-existing styles can be seen in @ref{Built-in Styles}.
2699
2700 The dotted pairs (@var{variable} . @var{value}) each consist of a
2701 variable and the value it is to be set to when the style is later
2702 activated.@footnote{Note that if the variable has been given a value
2703 by the Customization interface or a @code{setq} at the top level of
2704 your @file{.emacs}, this value will override the one the style system
2705 tries to give it. @xref{Config Basics}.} The variable can be either a
2706 @ccmode{} style variable or an arbitrary Emacs variable. In the
2707 latter case, it is @emph{not} made buffer-local by the @ccmode{} style
2708 system.
2709 @c @end defvr
2710
2711 Two variables are treated specially in the dotted pair list:
2712
2713 @table @code
2714 @item c-offsets-alist
2715 The value is in turn a list of dotted pairs of the form
2716
2717 @example
2718 (@r{@var{syntactic-symbol}} . @r{@var{offset}})
2719 @end example
2720
2721 as described in @ref{c-offsets-alist}. These are passed to
2722 @code{c-set-offset} so there is no need to set every syntactic symbol
2723 in your style, only those that are different from the inherited style.
2724
2725 @item c-special-indent-hook
2726 The value is added to @code{c-special-indent-hook} using
2727 @code{add-hook}, so any functions already on it are kept. If the value
2728 is a list, each element of the list is added with @code{add-hook}.
2729 @end table
2730 @end table
2731
2732 Styles are kept in the @code{c-style-alist} variable, but you
2733 should never modify this variable directly. Instead, @ccmode{}
2734 provides the function @code{c-add-style} for this purpose.
2735
2736 @defun c-add-style stylename description &optional set-p
2737 @findex add-style (c-)
2738 Add or update a style called @var{stylename}, a string.
2739 @var{description} is the new style definition in the form described
2740 above. If @var{stylename} already exists in @code{c-style-alist} then
2741 it is replaced by @var{description}. (Note, this replacement is
2742 total. The old style is @emph{not} merged into the new one.)
2743 Otherwise, a new style is added.
2744
2745 If the optional @var{set-p} is non-@code{nil} then the new style is
2746 applied to the current buffer as well. The use of this facility is
2747 deprecated and it might be removed from @ccmode{} in a future release.
2748 You should use @code{c-set-style} instead.
2749
2750 The sample @file{.emacs} file provides a concrete example of how a new
2751 style can be added and automatically set. @xref{Sample Init File}.
2752 @end defun
2753
2754 @defvar c-style-alist
2755 @vindex style-alist (c-)
2756 This is the variable that holds the definitions for the styles. It
2757 should not be changed directly; use @code{c-add-style} instead.
2758 @end defvar
2759
2760 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2761 @node Guessing the Style, File Styles, Adding Styles, Styles
2762 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2763 @subsection Guessing the Style
2764 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2765
2766 Instead of specifying a style, you can get @ccmode{} to @dfn{guess}
2767 your style by examining an already formatted code buffer. @ccmode{}
2768 then determines the ''most frequent'' offset (@pxref{c-offsets-alist})
2769 for each of the syntactic symbols (@pxref{Indentation Engine Basics})
2770 encountered in the buffer, and the ''most frequent'' value of
2771 c-basic-offset (@pxref{Customizing Indentation}), then merges the
2772 current style with these ''guesses'' to form a new style. This
2773 combined style is known as the @dfn{guessed style}.
2774
2775 To do this, call @code{c-guess} (or one of the other 5 guessing
2776 commands) on your sample buffer. The analysis of your code may take
2777 some time.
2778
2779 You can then set the guessed style in any @ccmode{} buffer with
2780 @code{c-guess-install}. You can display the style with
2781 @code{c-guess-view}, and preserve it by copying it into your
2782 @file{.emacs} for future use, preferably after editing it.
2783
2784 @table @asis
2785 @item @kbd{M-x c-guess-no-install}
2786 @itemx @kbd{M-x c-guess-buffer-no-install}
2787 @itemx @kbd{M-x c-guess-region-no-install}
2788 @findex c-guess-no-install
2789 @findex c-guess-buffer-no-install
2790 @findex c-guess-region-no-install
2791 @findex guess-no-install (c-)
2792 @findex guess-buffer-no-install (c-)
2793 @findex guess-region-no-install (c-)
2794 These commands analyze a part of the current buffer and guess the
2795 style from it.
2796
2797 The part of the buffer examined is either the region
2798 (@code{c-guess-region-no-install}), the entire buffer
2799 (@code{c-guess-buffer-no-install}), or the first
2800 @code{c-guess-region-max} bytes (@code{c-guess-no-install}).
2801
2802 Each of these commands can be given an optional prefix argument. This
2803 instructs @ccmode{} to combine the new guesses with the current
2804 guesses before forming the guessed style.
2805 @end table
2806
2807 @table @asis
2808 @item @kbd{M-x c-guess}
2809 @itemx @kbd{M-x c-guess-buffer}
2810 @itemx @kbd{M-x c-guess-region}
2811 @findex c-guess
2812 @findex c-guess-buffer
2813 @findex c-guess-region
2814 @findex guess (c-)
2815 @findex guess-buffer (c-)
2816 @findex guess-region (c-)
2817 These commands analyze a part of the current buffer, guess the style
2818 from it, then install the guessed style on the buffer. The guessed
2819 style is given a name based on the buffer's absolute file name, and
2820 you can then set this style on any @ccmode{} buffer with @kbd{C-c .}.
2821
2822 The part of the buffer examined is either the region
2823 (@code{c-guess-region}), the entire buffer (@code{c-guess-buffer}), or
2824 the first @code{c-guess-region-max} bytes (@code{c-guess}).
2825
2826 Each of these commands can be given an optional prefix argument. This
2827 instructs @ccmode{} to combine the new guesses with the current
2828 guesses before forming the guessed style.
2829 @end table
2830
2831 @defopt c-guess-region-max
2832 @vindex guess-region-max (c-)
2833 This variable, default 50000, is the size in bytes of the buffer
2834 portion examined by c-guess and c-guess-no-install. If set to
2835 @code{nil}, the entire buffer is examined.
2836 @end defopt
2837
2838 @defopt c-guess-offset-threshold
2839 @vindex guess-offset-threshold (c-)
2840 This variable, default 10, is the maximum offset, either outwards or
2841 inwards, which will be taken into account by the analysis process.
2842 Any offset bigger than this will be ignored. For no limit, set this
2843 variable to a large number.
2844 @end defopt
2845
2846 @table @asis
2847 @item @kbd{M-x c-guess-install}
2848 @findex c-guess-install
2849 @findex guess-install (c-)
2850
2851 Set the current buffer's style to the guessed style. This prompts you
2852 to enter an optional new style name to give to the guessed style. By
2853 default, this name is based on the buffer's absolute file name. You
2854 can then use this style like any other.
2855
2856 @item @kbd{M-x c-guess-view}
2857 @findex c-guess-view
2858 @findex guess-view (c-)
2859 Display the most recently guessed style in a temporary buffer. This
2860 display is in the form of a @code{c-add-style} form (@pxref{Adding
2861 Styles}) which can be easily copied to your @file{.emacs}. You will
2862 probably want to edit it first.
2863
2864 The display of the guessed style contains these elements:
2865
2866 @table @asis
2867 @item Placeholder Name
2868 You should replace this with a style name of your own.
2869 @item Parent Style
2870 The style current when the guessing began, from which the guessed
2871 style inherits (@pxref{Config Basics}) the settings which weren't
2872 guessed.
2873 @item Guessed Offsets
2874 These are the core result of the guessing process. Each of them is
2875 marked by a comment.
2876 @item Inherited Offsets
2877 These are syntactic offsets which have been taken over from the parent
2878 style. To avoid possible future conflicts, you should remove either
2879 these offsets or the parent style name.
2880 @end table
2881 @end table
2882
2883 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2884 @node File Styles, , Guessing the Style, Styles
2885 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2886 @subsection File Styles
2887 @cindex styles, file local
2888 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2889
2890 @cindex file local variables
2891
2892 The Emacs manual describes how you can customize certain variables on a
2893 per-file basis by including a @dfn{file local variable} block at the end
2894 of the file (@pxref{File Variables,, Local Variables in Files,@emacsman{},
2895 @emacsmantitle{}}).
2896
2897 So far, you've only seen a functional interface for setting styles in
2898 @ccmode{}, and this can't be used here. @ccmode{} fills the gap by
2899 providing two variables for use in a file's local variable list.
2900 Don't use them anywhere else! These allow you to customize the style
2901 on a per-file basis:
2902
2903 @defvar c-file-style
2904 @vindex file-style (c-)
2905 Set this variable to a style name string in the Local Variables list.
2906 From now on, when you visit the file, @ccmode{} will automatically set
2907 the file's style to this one using @code{c-set-style}.
2908 @end defvar
2909
2910 @defvar c-file-offsets
2911 @vindex file-offsets (c-)
2912 Set this variable (in the Local Variables list) to an association list
2913 of the same format as @code{c-offsets-alist}. From now on, when you
2914 visit the file, @ccmode{} will automatically institute these offsets
2915 using @code{c-set-offset}.
2916 @end defvar
2917
2918 Note that file style settings (i.e., @code{c-file-style}) are applied
2919 before file offset settings
2920 (i.e., @code{c-file-offsets})@footnote{Also, if either of these are set
2921 in a file's local variable section, all the style variable values are
2922 made local to that buffer, even if
2923 @code{c-style-variables-are-local-p} is @code{nil}. Since this
2924 variable is virtually always non-@code{nil} anyhow, you're unlikely to
2925 notice this effect.}.
2926
2927 If you set any variable by the file local variables mechanism, that
2928 setting takes priority over all other settings, even those in your
2929 mode hooks (@pxref{CC Hooks}). Any individual setting of a variable
2930 will override one made through @code{c-file-style} or
2931 @code{c-file-offsets}.
2932 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2933 @node Custom Filling and Breaking, Custom Auto-newlines, Config Basics, Top
2934 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2935 @chapter Customizing Filling and Line Breaking
2936 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2937
2938 Since there's a lot of normal text in comments and string literals,
2939 @ccmode{} provides features to edit these like in text mode. It does
2940 this by hooking in on the different line breaking functions and tuning
2941 relevant variables as necessary.
2942
2943 @vindex c-comment-prefix-regexp
2944 @vindex comment-prefix-regexp (c-)
2945 @cindex comment line prefix
2946 @vindex comment-start
2947 @vindex comment-end
2948 @vindex comment-start-skip
2949 @vindex paragraph-start
2950 @vindex paragraph-separate
2951 @vindex paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix
2952 @vindex adaptive-fill-mode
2953 @vindex adaptive-fill-regexp
2954 @vindex adaptive-fill-first-line-regexp
2955 To make Emacs recognize comments and treat text in them as normal
2956 paragraphs, @ccmode{} makes several standard
2957 variables@footnote{@code{comment-start}, @code{comment-end},
2958 @code{comment-start-skip}, @code{paragraph-start},
2959 @code{paragraph-separate}, @code{paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix},
2960 @code{adaptive-fill-mode}, @code{adaptive-fill-regexp}, and
2961 @code{adaptive-fill-first-line-regexp}.} buffer-local and modifies them
2962 according to the language syntax and the comment line prefix.
2963
2964 @defopt c-comment-prefix-regexp
2965 @vindex comment-prefix-regexp (c-)
2966 This style variable contains the regexp used to recognize the
2967 @dfn{comment line prefix}, which is the line decoration that starts
2968 every line in a comment. The variable is either the comment line
2969 prefix itself, or (more usually) an association list with different
2970 values for different languages. The symbol for the major mode is
2971 looked up in the alist to get the regexp for the language, and if it
2972 isn't found then the special symbol @samp{other} is looked up instead.
2973
2974 When a comment line gets divided by @kbd{M-j} or the like, @ccmode{}
2975 inserts the comment line prefix from a neighboring line at the start
2976 of the new line. The default value of c-comment-prefix-regexp is
2977 @samp{//+\\|\\**}, which matches C++ style line comments like
2978
2979 @example
2980 // blah blah
2981 @end example
2982
2983 @noindent
2984 with two or more slashes in front of them, and the second and
2985 subsequent lines of C style block comments like
2986
2987 @example
2988 @group
2989 /*
2990 * blah blah
2991 */
2992 @end group
2993 @end example
2994
2995 @noindent
2996 with zero or more stars at the beginning of every line. If you change
2997 this variable, please make sure it still matches the comment starter
2998 (i.e., @code{//}) of line comments @emph{and} the line prefix inside
2999 block comments.
3000
3001 @findex c-setup-paragraph-variables
3002 @findex setup-paragraph-variables (c-)
3003 Also note that since @ccmode{} uses the value of
3004 @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} to set up several other variables at
3005 mode initialization, there won't be any effect if you just change it
3006 inside a @ccmode{} buffer. You need to call the command
3007 @code{c-setup-paragraph-variables} too, to update those other
3008 variables. That's also the case if you modify
3009 @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} in a mode hook, since @ccmode{} will
3010 already have set up these variables before calling the hook.
3011 @end defopt
3012
3013 In comments, @ccmode{} uses @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} to adapt
3014 the line prefix from the other lines in the comment.
3015
3016 @vindex adaptive-fill-mode
3017 @cindex Adaptive Fill mode
3018 @ccmode{} uses adaptive fill mode (@pxref{Adaptive Fill,,, emacs, GNU
3019 Emacs Manual}) to make Emacs correctly keep the line prefix when
3020 filling paragraphs. That also makes Emacs preserve the text
3021 indentation @emph{inside} the comment line prefix. E.g., in the
3022 following comment, both paragraphs will be filled with the left
3023 margins of the texts kept intact:
3024
3025 @example
3026 @group
3027 /* Make a balanced b-tree of the nodes in the incoming
3028 * stream. But, to quote the famous words of Donald E.
3029 * Knuth,
3030 *
3031 * Beware of bugs in the above code; I have only
3032 * proved it correct, not tried it.
3033 */
3034 @end group
3035 @end example
3036
3037 @findex c-setup-filladapt
3038 @findex setup-filladapt (c-)
3039 @findex filladapt-mode
3040 @vindex filladapt-mode
3041 @cindex Filladapt mode
3042 It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages, notably Kyle
3043 E. Jones' Filladapt package@footnote{It's available from
3044 @uref{http://www.wonderworks.com/}. As of version 2.12, it does however
3045 lack a feature that makes it work suboptimally when
3046 @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} matches the empty string (which it does
3047 by default). A patch for that is available from
3048 @uref{http://cc-mode.sourceforge.net/,, the CC Mode web site}.},
3049 @c 2005/11/22: The above is still believed to be the case.
3050 which handles things like bulleted lists nicely. There's a convenience
3051 function @code{c-setup-filladapt} that tunes the relevant variables in
3052 Filladapt for use in @ccmode{}. Call it from a mode hook, e.g., with
3053 something like this in your @file{.emacs}:
3054
3055 @example
3056 (defun my-c-mode-common-hook ()
3057 (c-setup-filladapt)
3058 (filladapt-mode 1))
3059 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook 'my-c-mode-common-hook)
3060 @end example
3061
3062 @defopt c-block-comment-prefix
3063 @vindex block-comment-prefix (c-)
3064 @vindex c-comment-continuation-stars
3065 @vindex comment-continuation-stars (c-)
3066 Normally the comment line prefix inserted for a new line inside a
3067 comment is deduced from other lines in it. However there's one
3068 situation when there's no hint about what the prefix should look like,
3069 namely when a block comment is broken for the first time. This style
3070 variable@footnote{In versions before 5.26, this variable was called
3071 @code{c-comment-continuation-stars}. As a compatibility measure,
3072 @ccmode{} still uses the value on that variable if it's set.} is used
3073 then as the comment prefix. It defaults to @samp{*
3074 }@footnote{Actually, this default setting of
3075 @code{c-block-comment-prefix} typically gets overridden by the default
3076 style @code{gnu}, which sets it to blank. You can see the line
3077 splitting effect described here by setting a different style,
3078 e.g., @code{k&r} @xref{Choosing a Style}.}, which makes a comment
3079
3080 @example
3081 /* Got O(n^2) here, which is a Bad Thing. */
3082 @end example
3083
3084 @noindent
3085 break into
3086
3087 @example
3088 @group
3089 /* Got O(n^2) here, which
3090 * is a Bad Thing. */
3091 @end group
3092 @end example
3093
3094 Note that it won't work to adjust the indentation by putting leading
3095 spaces in @code{c-block-comment-prefix}, since @ccmode{} still uses the
3096 normal indentation engine to indent the line. Thus, the right way to
3097 fix the indentation is by customizing the @code{c} syntactic symbol. It
3098 defaults to @code{c-lineup-C-comments}, which handles the indentation of
3099 most common comment styles, see @ref{Line-Up Functions}.
3100 @end defopt
3101
3102 @defopt c-ignore-auto-fill
3103 @vindex ignore-auto-fill (c-)
3104 When auto fill mode is enabled, @ccmode{} can selectively ignore it
3105 depending on the context the line break would occur in, e.g., to never
3106 break a line automatically inside a string literal. This variable
3107 takes a list of symbols for the different contexts where auto-filling
3108 never should occur:
3109
3110 @table @code
3111 @item string
3112 Inside a string or character literal.
3113 @item c
3114 Inside a C style block comment.
3115 @item c++
3116 Inside a C++ style line comment.
3117 @item cpp
3118 Inside a preprocessor directive.
3119 @item code
3120 Anywhere else, i.e., in normal code.
3121 @end table
3122
3123 By default, @code{c-ignore-auto-fill} is set to @code{(string cpp
3124 code)}, which means that when auto-fill mode is activated,
3125 auto-filling only occurs in comments. In literals, it's often
3126 desirable to have explicit control over newlines. In preprocessor
3127 directives, the necessary @samp{\} escape character before the newline
3128 is not automatically inserted, so an automatic line break would
3129 produce invalid code. In normal code, line breaks are normally
3130 dictated by some logical structure in the code rather than the last
3131 whitespace character, so automatic line breaks there will produce poor
3132 results in the current implementation.
3133 @end defopt
3134
3135 @vindex comment-multi-line
3136 If inside a comment and @code{comment-multi-line} (@pxref{Auto
3137 Fill,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}} is non-@code{nil}, the
3138 indentation and
3139 line prefix are preserved. If inside a comment and
3140 @code{comment-multi-line} is @code{nil}, a new comment of the same
3141 type is started on the next line and indented as appropriate for
3142 comments.
3143
3144 Note that @ccmode{} sets @code{comment-multi-line} to @code{t} at
3145 startup. The reason is that @kbd{M-j} could otherwise produce sequences
3146 of single line block comments for texts that should logically be treated
3147 as one comment, and the rest of the paragraph handling code
3148 (e.g., @kbd{M-q} and @kbd{M-a}) can't cope with that, which would lead to
3149 inconsistent behavior.
3150
3151 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3152 @node Custom Auto-newlines, Clean-ups, Custom Filling and Breaking, Top
3153 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3154 @chapter Customizing Auto-newlines
3155 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3156
3157 @ccmode{} determines whether to insert auto-newlines in two basically
3158 different ways, depending on the character just typed:
3159
3160 @table @asis
3161 @item Braces and Colons
3162 @ccmode{} first determines the syntactic context of the brace or colon
3163 (@pxref{Syntactic Symbols}), then looks for a corresponding element in
3164 an alist. This element specifies where to put newlines: this is any
3165 combination of before and after the brace or colon. If no alist
3166 element is found, newlines are inserted both before and after a brace,
3167 but none are inserted around a colon. See @ref{Hanging Braces} and
3168 @ref{Hanging Colons}.
3169
3170 @item Semicolons and Commas
3171 The variable @code{c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria} contains a list of
3172 functions which determine whether to insert a newline after a newly
3173 typed semicolon or comma. @xref{Hanging Semicolons and Commas}.
3174 @end table
3175
3176 The names of these configuration variables contain @samp{hanging}
3177 because they let you @dfn{hang} the pertinent characters. A character
3178 which introduces a C construct is said to @dfn{hang on the right} when
3179 it appears at the end of a line after other code, being separated by a
3180 line break from the construct it introduces, like the opening brace in:
3181
3182 @example
3183 @group
3184 while (i < MAX) @{
3185 total += entry[i];
3186 entry [i++] = 0;
3187 @}
3188 @end group
3189 @end example
3190
3191 @noindent
3192 A character @dfn{hangs on the left} when it appears at the start of
3193 the line after the construct it closes off, like the above closing
3194 brace.
3195
3196 The next chapter, ``Clean-ups'', describes how to configure @ccmode{}
3197 to remove these automatically added newlines in certain specific
3198 circumstances. @xref{Clean-ups}.
3199
3200 @menu
3201 * Hanging Braces::
3202 * Hanging Colons::
3203 * Hanging Semicolons and Commas::
3204 @end menu
3205
3206
3207 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3208 @node Hanging Braces, Hanging Colons, Custom Auto-newlines, Custom Auto-newlines
3209 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3210 @section Hanging Braces
3211 @cindex hanging braces
3212 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3213
3214 To specify which kinds of braces you want auto-newlines put around,
3215 you set the style variable @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}. Its
3216 structure and semantics are described in this section. Details of how
3217 to set it up, and its relationship to CC Mode's style system are given
3218 in @ref{Style Variables}.
3219
3220 Say you wanted an auto-newline after (but not before) the following
3221 @samp{@{}:
3222
3223 @example
3224 if (foo < 17) @{
3225 @end example
3226
3227 @noindent
3228 First you need to find the @dfn{syntactic context} of the brace---type
3229 a @key{RET} before the brace to get it on a line of its
3230 own@footnote{Also insert a @samp{\} at the end of the previous line if
3231 you're in AWK Mode.}, then type @kbd{C-c C-s}. That will tell you
3232 something like:
3233
3234 @example
3235 ((substatement-open 1061))
3236 @end example
3237
3238 @noindent
3239 So here you need to put the entry @code{(substatement-open . (after))}
3240 into @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}.
3241
3242 If you don't want any auto-newlines for a particular syntactic symbol,
3243 put this into @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}:
3244
3245 @example
3246 (brace-entry-open)
3247 @end example
3248
3249 If some brace syntactic symbol is not in @code{c-hanging-brace-alist},
3250 its entry is taken by default as @code{(before after)}---insert a
3251 newline both before and after the brace. In place of a
3252 ``before/after'' list you can specify a function in this alist---this
3253 is useful when the auto newlines depend on the code around the brace.
3254
3255 @defopt c-hanging-braces-alist
3256 @vindex hanging-braces-alist (c-)
3257
3258 This variable is an association list which maps syntactic symbols to
3259 lists of places to insert a newline. @xref{Association
3260 Lists,,,@lispref{}, @lispreftitle{}}. The key of each element is the
3261 syntactic symbol, the associated value is either @code{nil}, a list,
3262 or a function.
3263
3264 @table @asis
3265 @item The Key: the syntactic symbol
3266 The syntactic symbols that are useful as keys in this list are
3267 @code{brace-list-intro}, @code{statement-cont},
3268 @code{inexpr-class-open}, @code{inexpr-class-close}, and all the
3269 @code{*-open} and @code{*-close} symbols. @xref{Syntactic Symbols},
3270 for a more detailed description of these syntactic symbols, except for
3271 @code{inexpr-class-open} and @code{inexpr-class-close}, which aren't
3272 actual syntactic symbols. Elements with any other value as a key get
3273 ignored.
3274
3275 The braces of anonymous inner classes in Java are given the special
3276 symbols @code{inexpr-class-open} and @code{inexpr-class-close}, so that
3277 they can be distinguished from the braces of normal classes@footnote{The
3278 braces of anonymous classes produce a combination of
3279 @code{inexpr-class}, and @code{class-open} or @code{class-close} in
3280 normal indentation analysis.}.
3281
3282 Note that the aggregate constructs in Pike mode, @samp{(@{}, @samp{@})},
3283 @samp{([}, @samp{])}, and @samp{(<}, @samp{>)}, do not count as brace
3284 lists in this regard, even though they do for normal indentation
3285 purposes. It's currently not possible to set automatic newlines on
3286 these constructs.
3287
3288 @item The associated value: the ``ACTION'' list or function
3289 The value associated with each syntactic symbol in this association
3290 list is called an @var{action}, which can be either a list or a
3291 function which returns a list. @xref{Custom Braces}, for how to use
3292 a function as a brace hanging @var{action}.
3293
3294 The list @var{action} (or the list returned by @var{action} when it's
3295 a function) contains some combination of the symbols @code{before} and
3296 @code{after}, directing @ccmode{} where to put newlines in
3297 relationship to the brace being inserted. Thus, if the list contains
3298 only the symbol @code{after}, then the brace hangs on the right side
3299 of the line, as in:
3300
3301 @example
3302 // here, open braces always 'hang'
3303 void spam( int i ) @{
3304 if( i == 7 ) @{
3305 dosomething(i);
3306 @}
3307 @}
3308 @end example
3309
3310 When the list contains both @code{after} and @code{before}, the braces
3311 will appear on a line by themselves, as shown by the close braces in
3312 the above example. The list can also be empty, in which case newlines
3313 are added neither before nor after the brace.
3314 @end table
3315
3316 If a syntactic symbol is missing entirely from
3317 @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}, it's treated in the same way as an
3318 @var{action} with a list containing @code{before} and @code{after}, so
3319 that braces by default end up on their own line.
3320
3321 For example, the default value of @code{c-hanging-braces-alist} is:
3322
3323 @example
3324 ((brace-list-open)
3325 (brace-entry-open)
3326 (statement-cont)
3327 (substatement-open after)
3328 (block-close . c-snug-do-while)
3329 (extern-lang-open after)
3330 (namespace-open after)
3331 (module-open after)
3332 (composition-open after)
3333 (inexpr-class-open after)
3334 (inexpr-class-close before))
3335 @end example
3336
3337 @noindent which says that @code{brace-list-open},
3338 @code{brace-entry-open} and @code{statement-cont}@footnote{Brace lists
3339 inside statements, such as initializers for static array variables
3340 inside functions in C, are recognized as @code{statement-cont}. All
3341 normal substatement blocks are recognized with other symbols.} braces
3342 should both hang on the right side and allow subsequent text to follow
3343 on the same line as the brace. Also, @code{substatement-open},
3344 @code{extern-lang-open}, and @code{inexpr-class-open} braces should hang
3345 on the right side, but subsequent text should follow on the next line.
3346 The opposite holds for @code{inexpr-class-close} braces; they won't
3347 hang, but the following text continues on the same line. Here, in the
3348 @code{block-close} entry, you also see an example of using a function as
3349 an @var{action}. In all other cases, braces are put on a line by
3350 themselves.
3351 @end defopt
3352
3353 @menu
3354 * Custom Braces::
3355 @end menu
3356
3357 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3358 @node Custom Braces, , Hanging Braces, Hanging Braces
3359 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3360 @subsection Custom Brace Hanging
3361 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3362
3363 @vindex c-hanging-braces-alist
3364 @vindex hanging-braces-alist (c-)
3365 @cindex action functions
3366 Syntactic symbols aren't the only place where you can customize
3367 @ccmode{} with the lisp equivalent of callback functions. Remember
3368 that @var{action}s are usually a list containing some combination of
3369 the symbols @code{before} and @code{after} (@pxref{Hanging Braces}).
3370 For more flexibility, you can instead specify brace ``hanginess'' by
3371 giving a syntactic symbol an @dfn{action function} in
3372 @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}; this function determines the
3373 ``hanginess'' of a brace, usually by looking at the code near it.
3374
3375 @cindex customization, brace hanging
3376 An action function is called with two arguments: the syntactic symbol
3377 for the brace (e.g., @code{substatement-open}), and the buffer position
3378 where the brace has been inserted. Point is undefined on entry to an
3379 action function, but the function must preserve it (e.g., by using
3380 @code{save-excursion}). The return value should be a list containing
3381 some combination of @code{before} and @code{after}, including neither
3382 of them (i.e., @code{nil}).
3383
3384 @defvar c-syntactic-context
3385 @vindex syntactic-context (c-)
3386 During the call to the indentation or brace hanging @var{action}
3387 function, this variable is bound to the full syntactic analysis list.
3388 This might be, for example, @samp{((block-close 73))}. Don't ever
3389 give @code{c-syntactic-context} a value yourself---this would disrupt
3390 the proper functioning of @ccmode{}.
3391
3392 This variable is also bound in three other circumstances:
3393 (i)@w{ }when calling a c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria function
3394 (@pxref{Hanging Semicolons and Commas}); (ii)@w{ }when calling a
3395 line-up function (@pxref{Custom Line-Up}); (iii)@w{ }when calling a
3396 c-special-indent-hook function (@pxref{Other Indentation}).
3397 @end defvar
3398
3399 As an example, @ccmode{} itself uses this feature to dynamically
3400 determine the hanginess of braces which close ``do-while''
3401 constructs:
3402
3403 @example
3404 void do_list( int count, char** atleast_one_string )
3405 @{
3406 int i=0;
3407 do @{
3408 handle_string( atleast_one_string[i] );
3409 i++;
3410 @} while( i < count );
3411 @}
3412 @end example
3413
3414 @ccmode{} assigns the @code{block-close} syntactic symbol to the
3415 brace that closes the @code{do} construct, and normally we'd like the
3416 line that follows a @code{block-close} brace to begin on a separate
3417 line. However, with ``do-while'' constructs, we want the
3418 @code{while} clause to follow the closing brace. To do this, we
3419 associate the @code{block-close} symbol with the @var{action} function
3420 @code{c-snug-do-while}:
3421
3422 @example
3423 (defun c-snug-do-while (syntax pos)
3424 "Dynamically calculate brace hanginess for do-while statements."
3425 (save-excursion
3426 (let (langelem)
3427 (if (and (eq syntax 'block-close)
3428 (setq langelem (assq 'block-close c-syntactic-context))
3429 (progn (goto-char (cdr langelem))
3430 (if (= (following-char) ?@{)
3431 (forward-sexp -1))
3432 (looking-at "\\<do\\>[^_]")))
3433 '(before)
3434 '(before after)))))
3435 @end example
3436
3437 @findex c-snug-do-while
3438 @findex snug-do-while (c-)
3439 This function simply looks to see if the brace closes a ``do-while''
3440 clause and if so, returns the list @samp{(before)} indicating
3441 that a newline should be inserted before the brace, but not after it.
3442 In all other cases, it returns the list @samp{(before after)} so
3443 that the brace appears on a line by itself.
3444
3445 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3446 @node Hanging Colons, Hanging Semicolons and Commas, Hanging Braces, Custom Auto-newlines
3447 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3448 @section Hanging Colons
3449 @cindex hanging colons
3450 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3451
3452 @cindex customization, colon hanging
3453 @vindex c-hanging-colons-alist
3454 @vindex hanging-colons-alist (c-)
3455
3456 Using a mechanism similar to brace hanging (@pxref{Hanging Braces}),
3457 colons can also be made to hang using the style variable
3458 @code{c-hanging-colons-alist}: when a colon is typed, @ccmode
3459 determines its syntactic context, looks this up in the alist
3460 @code{c-changing-colons-alist} and inserts up to two newlines
3461 accordingly. Here, however, If @ccmode fails to find an entry for a
3462 syntactic symbol in the alist, no newlines are inserted around the
3463 newly typed colon.
3464
3465 @defopt c-hanging-colons-alist
3466 @vindex hanging-colons-alist (c-)
3467
3468 @table @asis
3469 @item The Key: the syntactic symbol
3470 The syntactic symbols appropriate as keys in this association list
3471 are: @code{case-label}, @code{label}, @code{access-label},
3472 @code{member-init-intro}, and @code{inher-intro}. @xref{Syntactic
3473 Symbols}. Elements with any other value as a key get ignored.
3474
3475 @item The associated value: the ``ACTION'' list
3476 The @var{action} here is simply a list containing a combination of the
3477 symbols @code{before} and @code{after}. Unlike in
3478 @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}, functions as @var{actions} are not
3479 supported; there doesn't seem to be any need for them.
3480 @end table
3481 @end defopt
3482
3483 In C++, double-colons are used as a scope operator but because these
3484 colons always appear right next to each other, newlines before and after
3485 them are controlled by a different mechanism, called @dfn{clean-ups} in
3486 @ccmode{}. @xref{Clean-ups}, for details.
3487
3488 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3489 @node Hanging Semicolons and Commas, , Hanging Colons, Custom Auto-newlines
3490 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3491 @section Hanging Semicolons and Commas
3492 @cindex hanging semicolons
3493 @cindex hanging commas
3494 @cindex customization, semicolon newlines
3495 @cindex customization, comma newlines
3496 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3497
3498 @defopt c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria
3499 @vindex hanging-semi&comma-criteria (c-)
3500 This style variable takes a list of functions; these get called when
3501 you type a semicolon or comma. The functions are called in order
3502 without arguments. When these functions are entered, point is just
3503 after the newly inserted @samp{;} or @samp{,} and they must preserve
3504 point (e.g., by using @code{save-excursion}). During the call, the
3505 variable @code{c-syntactic-context} is bound to the syntactic context
3506 of the current line@footnote{This was first introduced in @ccmode{}
3507 5.31.} @pxref{Custom Braces}. These functions don't insert newlines
3508 themselves, rather they direct @ccmode{} whether or not to do so.
3509 They should return one of the following values:
3510
3511 @table @code
3512 @item t
3513 A newline is to be inserted after the @samp{;} or @samp{,}, and no
3514 more functions from the list are to be called.
3515 @item stop
3516 No more functions from the list are to be called, and no newline is to
3517 be inserted.
3518 @item nil
3519 No determination has been made, and the next function in the list is
3520 to be called.
3521 @end table
3522
3523 Note that auto-newlines are never inserted @emph{before} a semicolon
3524 or comma. If every function in the list is called without a
3525 determination being made, then no newline is added.
3526
3527 In AWK mode, this variable is set by default to @code{nil}. In the
3528 other modes, the default value is a list containing a single function,
3529 @code{c-semi&comma-inside-parenlist}. This inserts newlines after all
3530 semicolons, apart from those separating @code{for}-clause statements.
3531 @end defopt
3532
3533 @defun c-semi&comma-no-newlines-before-nonblanks
3534 @findex semi&comma-no-newlines-before-nonblanks (c-)
3535 This is an example of a criteria function, provided by @ccmode{}. It
3536 prevents newlines from being inserted after semicolons when there is a
3537 non-blank following line. Otherwise, it makes no determination. To
3538 use, add this function to the front of the
3539 @code{c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria} list.
3540
3541 @example
3542 (defun c-semi&comma-no-newlines-before-nonblanks ()
3543 (save-excursion
3544 (if (and (eq last-command-char ?\;)
3545 (zerop (forward-line 1))
3546 (not (looking-at "^[ \t]*$")))
3547 'stop
3548 nil)))
3549 @end example
3550 @end defun
3551
3552 @defun c-semi&comma-inside-parenlist
3553 @findex semi&comma-inside-parenlist (c-)
3554 @defunx c-semi&comma-no-newlines-for-oneline-inliners
3555 @findex semi&comma-no-newlines-for-oneline-inliners (c-)
3556 The function @code{c-semi&comma-inside-parenlist} is what prevents
3557 newlines from being inserted inside the parenthesis list of @code{for}
3558 statements. In addition to
3559 @code{c-semi&comma-no-newlines-before-nonblanks} described above,
3560 @ccmode{} also comes with the criteria function
3561 @code{c-semi&comma-no-newlines-for-oneline-inliners}, which suppresses
3562 newlines after semicolons inside one-line inline method definitions
3563 (e.g., in C++ or Java).
3564 @end defun
3565
3566
3567 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3568 @node Clean-ups, Indentation Engine Basics, Custom Auto-newlines, Top
3569 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3570 @chapter Clean-ups
3571 @cindex clean-ups
3572 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3573
3574 @dfn{Clean-ups} are mechanisms which remove (or exceptionally, add)
3575 whitespace in specific circumstances and are complementary to colon
3576 and brace hanging. You enable a clean-up by adding its symbol into
3577 @code{c-cleanup-list}, e.g., like this:
3578
3579 @example
3580 (add-to-list 'c-cleanup-list 'space-before-funcall)
3581 @end example
3582
3583 On the surface, it would seem that clean-ups overlap the functionality
3584 provided by the @code{c-hanging-*-alist} variables. Clean-ups,
3585 however, are used to adjust code ``after-the-fact'', i.e., to adjust
3586 the whitespace in constructs later than when they were typed.
3587
3588 Most of the clean-ups remove automatically inserted newlines, and are
3589 only active when auto-newline minor mode is turned on. Others will
3590 work all the time. Note that clean-ups are only performed when there
3591 is nothing but whitespace appearing between the individual components
3592 of the construct, and (apart from @code{comment-close-slash}) when the
3593 construct does not occur within a literal (@pxref{Auto-newlines}).
3594
3595 @defopt c-cleanup-list
3596 @vindex cleanup-list (c-)
3597 @cindex literal
3598
3599 You configure @ccmode{}'s clean-ups by setting the style variable
3600 @code{c-cleanup-list}, which is a list of clean-up symbols. By
3601 default, @ccmode{} cleans up only the @code{scope-operator} construct,
3602 which is necessary for proper C++ support.
3603 @end defopt
3604
3605 These are the clean-ups that are only active when electric and
3606 auto-newline minor modes are enabled:
3607
3608 @c TBD: Would like to use some sort of @deffoo here; @table indents a
3609 @c bit too much in dvi output.
3610 @table @code
3611 @item brace-else-brace
3612 Clean up @samp{@} else @{} constructs by placing the entire construct on
3613 a single line. Clean up occurs when the open brace after the
3614 @samp{else} is typed. So for example, this:
3615
3616 @example
3617 @group
3618 void spam(int i)
3619 @{
3620 if( i==7 ) @{
3621 dosomething();
3622 @}
3623 else
3624 @{
3625 @end group
3626 @end example
3627
3628 @noindent
3629 appears like this after the last open brace is typed:
3630
3631 @example
3632 @group
3633 void spam(int i)
3634 @{
3635 if( i==7 ) @{
3636 dosomething();
3637 @} else @{
3638 @end group
3639 @end example
3640
3641 @item brace-elseif-brace
3642 Similar to the @code{brace-else-brace} clean-up, but this cleans up
3643 @samp{@} else if (...) @{} constructs. For example:
3644
3645 @example
3646 @group
3647 void spam(int i)
3648 @{
3649 if( i==7 ) @{
3650 dosomething();
3651 @}
3652 else if( i==3 )
3653 @{
3654 @end group
3655 @end example
3656
3657 @noindent
3658 appears like this after the last open parenthesis is typed:
3659
3660 @example
3661 @group
3662 void spam(int i)
3663 @{
3664 if( i==7 ) @{
3665 dosomething();
3666 @} else if(
3667 @end group
3668 @end example
3669
3670 @noindent
3671 and like this after the last open brace is typed:
3672
3673 @example
3674 @group
3675 void spam(int i)
3676 @{
3677 if( i==7 ) @{
3678 dosomething();
3679 @} else if( i==3 ) @{
3680 @end group
3681 @end example
3682
3683 @item brace-catch-brace
3684 Analogous to @code{brace-elseif-brace}, but cleans up @samp{@} catch
3685 (...) @{} in C++ and Java mode.
3686
3687 @item empty-defun-braces
3688 Clean up braces following a top-level function or class definition that
3689 contains no body. Clean up occurs when the closing brace is typed.
3690 Thus the following:
3691
3692 @example
3693 @group
3694 class Spam
3695 @{
3696 @}
3697 @end group
3698 @end example
3699
3700 @noindent
3701 is transformed into this when the close brace is typed:
3702
3703 @example
3704 @group
3705 class Spam
3706 @{@}
3707 @end group
3708 @end example
3709
3710 @item defun-close-semi
3711 Clean up the terminating semicolon on top-level function or class
3712 definitions when they follow a close brace. Clean up occurs when the
3713 semicolon is typed. So for example, the following:
3714
3715 @example
3716 @group
3717 class Spam
3718 @{
3719 ...
3720 @}
3721 ;
3722 @end group
3723 @end example
3724
3725 @noindent
3726 is transformed into this when the semicolon is typed:
3727
3728 @example
3729 @group
3730 class Spam
3731 @{
3732 ...
3733 @};
3734 @end group
3735 @end example
3736
3737 @item list-close-comma
3738 Clean up commas following braces in array and aggregate initializers.
3739 Clean up occurs when the comma is typed. The space before the comma
3740 is zapped just like the space before the semicolon in
3741 @code{defun-close-semi}.
3742
3743 @item scope-operator
3744 Clean up double colons which might designate a C++ scope operator split
3745 across multiple lines@footnote{Certain C++ constructs introduce
3746 ambiguous situations, so @code{scope-operator} clean-ups might not
3747 always be correct. This usually only occurs when scoped identifiers
3748 appear in switch label tags.}. Clean up occurs when the second colon is
3749 typed. You will always want @code{scope-operator} in the
3750 @code{c-cleanup-list} when you are editing C++ code.
3751
3752 @item one-liner-defun
3753 Clean up a single line of code enclosed by defun braces by removing
3754 the whitespace before and after the code. The clean-up happens when
3755 the closing brace is typed. If the variable
3756 @code{c-max-one-liner-length} is set, the cleanup is only done if the
3757 resulting line would be no longer than the value of that variable.
3758
3759 For example, consider this AWK code:
3760
3761 @example
3762 @group
3763 BEGIN @{
3764 FS = "\t" # use <TAB> as a field separator
3765 @}
3766 @end group
3767 @end example
3768
3769 @noindent
3770 It gets compacted to the following when the closing brace is typed:
3771
3772 @example
3773 @group
3774 BEGIN @{FS = "\t"@} # use <TAB> as a field separator
3775 @end group
3776 @end example
3777
3778 @defopt c-max-one-liner-length
3779 @vindex max-one-liner-length (c-)
3780 The maximum length of the resulting line for which the clean-up
3781 @code{one-liner-defun} will be triggered. This length is that of the entire
3782 line, including any leading whitespace and any trailing comment. Its
3783 default value is 80. If the value is zero or @code{nil}, no limit
3784 applies.
3785 @end defopt
3786 @end table
3787
3788 The following clean-ups are always active when they occur on
3789 @code{c-cleanup-list}, regardless of whether Electric minor mode or
3790 Auto-newline minor mode are enabled:
3791
3792 @table @code
3793 @item space-before-funcall
3794 Insert a space between the function name and the opening parenthesis
3795 of a function call. This produces function calls in the style
3796 mandated by the GNU coding standards, e.g., @samp{signal@w{ }(SIGINT,
3797 SIG_IGN)} and @samp{abort@w{ }()}. Clean up occurs when the opening
3798 parenthesis is typed. This clean-up should never be active in AWK
3799 Mode, since such a space is syntactically invalid for user defined
3800 functions.
3801
3802 @item compact-empty-funcall
3803 Clean up any space between the function name and the opening parenthesis
3804 of a function call that has no arguments. This is typically used
3805 together with @code{space-before-funcall} if you prefer the GNU function
3806 call style for functions with arguments but think it looks ugly when
3807 it's only an empty parenthesis pair. I.e., you will get @samp{signal
3808 (SIGINT, SIG_IGN)}, but @samp{abort()}. Clean up occurs when the
3809 closing parenthesis is typed.
3810
3811 @item comment-close-slash
3812 When inside a block comment, terminate the comment when you type a slash
3813 at the beginning of a line (i.e., immediately after the comment prefix).
3814 This clean-up removes whitespace preceding the slash and if needed,
3815 inserts a star to complete the token @samp{*/}. Type @kbd{C-q /} in this
3816 situation if you just want a literal @samp{/} inserted.
3817 @end table
3818
3819
3820 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3821 @node Indentation Engine Basics, Customizing Indentation, Clean-ups, Top
3822 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3823 @chapter Indentation Engine Basics
3824 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3825
3826 This chapter will briefly cover how @ccmode{} indents lines of code.
3827 It is helpful to understand the indentation model being used so that
3828 you will know how to customize @ccmode{} for your personal coding
3829 style. All the details are in @ref{Customizing Indentation}.
3830
3831 @ccmode{} has an indentation engine that provides a flexible and
3832 general mechanism for customizing indentation. When @ccmode{} indents
3833 a line of code, it separates its calculations into two steps:
3834
3835 @enumerate
3836 @item
3837 @cindex syntactic symbol
3838 @cindex anchor position
3839 It analyzes the line to determine its @dfn{syntactic symbol(s)} (the
3840 kind of language construct it's looking at) and its @dfn{anchor
3841 position} (the position earlier in the file that @ccmode{} will indent
3842 the line relative to). The anchor position might be the location of
3843 an opening brace in the previous line, for example. @xref{Syntactic
3844 Analysis}.
3845 @item
3846 @cindex offsets
3847 @cindex indentation offset specifications
3848 It looks up the syntactic symbol(s) in the configuration to get the
3849 corresponding @dfn{offset(s)}. The symbol @code{+}, which means
3850 ``indent this line one more level'' is a typical offset. @ccmode{}
3851 then applies these offset(s) to the anchor position, giving the
3852 indentation for the line. The different sorts of offsets are
3853 described in @ref{c-offsets-alist}.
3854 @end enumerate
3855
3856 In exceptional circumstances, the syntax directed indentation
3857 described here may be a nuisance rather than a help. You can disable
3858 it by setting @code{c-syntactic-indentation} to @code{nil}. (To set
3859 the variable interactively, @ref{Minor Modes}).
3860
3861 @defopt c-syntactic-indentation
3862 @vindex syntactic-indentation (c-)
3863 When this is non-@code{nil} (which it is by default), the indentation
3864 of code is done according to its syntactic structure. When it's
3865 @code{nil}, every line is just indented to the same level as the
3866 previous one, and @kbd{TAB} (@code{c-indent-command}) adjusts the
3867 indentation in steps of @code{c-basic-offset}. The current style
3868 (@pxref{Config Basics}) then has no effect on indentation, nor do any
3869 of the variables associated with indentation, not even
3870 @code{c-special-indent-hook}.
3871 @end defopt
3872
3873 @menu
3874 * Syntactic Analysis::
3875 * Syntactic Symbols::
3876 * Indentation Calculation::
3877 @end menu
3878
3879
3880 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3881 @node Syntactic Analysis, Syntactic Symbols, Indentation Engine Basics, Indentation Engine Basics
3882 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3883 @section Syntactic Analysis
3884 @cindex syntactic analysis
3885 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3886
3887 @cindex syntactic element
3888 @cindex syntactic context
3889 The first thing @ccmode{} does when indenting a line of code, is to
3890 analyze the line, determining the @dfn{syntactic context} of the
3891 (first) construct on that line. It's a list of @dfn{syntactic
3892 elements}, where each syntactic element in turn is a list@footnote{In
3893 @ccmode 5.28 and earlier, a syntactic element was a dotted pair; the
3894 cons was the syntactic symbol and the cdr was the anchor position.
3895 For compatibility's sake, the parameter passed to a line-up function
3896 still has this dotted pair form (@pxref{Custom Line-Up}).} Here is a
3897 brief and typical example:
3898
3899 @example
3900 ((defun-block-intro 1959))
3901 @end example
3902
3903 @cindex syntactic symbol
3904 @noindent
3905 The first thing inside each syntactic element is always a
3906 @dfn{syntactic symbol}. It describes the kind of construct that was
3907 recognized, e.g., @code{statement}, @code{substatement},
3908 @code{class-open}, @code{class-close}, etc. @xref{Syntactic Symbols},
3909 for a complete list of currently recognized syntactic symbols and
3910 their semantics. The remaining entries are various data associated
3911 with the recognized construct; there might be zero or more.
3912
3913 @cindex anchor position
3914 Conceptually, a line of code is always indented relative to some
3915 position higher up in the buffer (typically the indentation of the
3916 previous line). That position is the @dfn{anchor position} in the
3917 syntactic element. If there is an entry after the syntactic symbol in
3918 the syntactic element list then it's either @code{nil} or that anchor position.
3919
3920 Here is an example. Suppose we had the following code as the only thing
3921 in a C++ buffer @footnote{The line numbers in this and future examples
3922 don't actually appear in the buffer, of course!}:
3923
3924 @example
3925 1: void swap( int& a, int& b )
3926 2: @{
3927 3: int tmp = a;
3928 4: a = b;
3929 5: b = tmp;
3930 6: @}
3931 @end example
3932
3933 @noindent
3934 We can use @kbd{C-c C-s} (@code{c-show-syntactic-information}) to
3935 report what the syntactic analysis is for the current line:
3936
3937 @table @asis
3938 @item @kbd{C-c C-s} (@code{c-show-syntactic-information})
3939 @kindex C-c C-s
3940 @findex c-show-syntactic-information
3941 @findex show-syntactic-information (c-)
3942 This command calculates the syntactic analysis of the current line and
3943 displays it in the minibuffer. The command also highlights the anchor
3944 position(s).
3945 @end table
3946
3947 Running this command on line 4 of this example, we'd see in the echo
3948 area@footnote{With a universal argument (i.e., @kbd{C-u C-c C-s}) the
3949 analysis is inserted into the buffer as a comment on the current
3950 line.}:
3951
3952 @example
3953 ((statement 35))
3954 @end example
3955
3956 @noindent
3957 and the @samp{i} of @code{int} on line 3 would be highlighted. This
3958 tells us that the line is a statement and it is indented relative to
3959 buffer position 35, the highlighted position. If you were to move
3960 point to line 3 and hit @kbd{C-c C-s}, you would see:
3961
3962 @example
3963 ((defun-block-intro 29))
3964 @end example
3965
3966 @noindent
3967 This indicates that the @samp{int} line is the first statement in a top
3968 level function block, and is indented relative to buffer position 29,
3969 which is the brace just after the function header.
3970
3971 Here's another example:
3972
3973 @example
3974 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit )
3975 2: @{
3976 3: if( doit )
3977 4: @{
3978 5: return( val + incr );
3979 6: @}
3980 7: return( val );
3981 8: @}
3982 @end example
3983
3984 @noindent
3985 Hitting @kbd{C-c C-s} on line 4 gives us:
3986
3987 @example
3988 ((substatement-open 46))
3989 @end example
3990
3991 @cindex substatement
3992 @cindex substatement block
3993 @noindent
3994 which tells us that this is a brace that @emph{opens} a substatement
3995 block.@footnote{A @dfn{substatement} is the line after a
3996 conditional statement, such as @code{if}, @code{else}, @code{while},
3997 @code{do}, @code{switch}, etc. A @dfn{substatement
3998 block} is a brace block following one of these conditional statements.}
3999
4000 @cindex comment-only line
4001 Syntactic contexts can contain more than one element, and syntactic
4002 elements need not have anchor positions. The most common example of
4003 this is a @dfn{comment-only line}:
4004
4005 @example
4006 1: void draw_list( List<Drawables>& drawables )
4007 2: @{
4008 3: // call the virtual draw() method on each element in list
4009 4: for( int i=0; i < drawables.count(), ++i )
4010 5: @{
4011 6: drawables[i].draw();
4012 7: @}
4013 8: @}
4014 @end example
4015
4016 @noindent
4017 Hitting @kbd{C-c C-s} on line 3 of this example gives:
4018
4019 @example
4020 ((comment-intro) (defun-block-intro 46))
4021 @end example
4022
4023 @noindent
4024 and you can see that the syntactic context contains two syntactic
4025 elements. Notice that the first element, @samp{(comment-intro)}, has no
4026 anchor position.
4027
4028
4029 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4030 @node Syntactic Symbols, Indentation Calculation, Syntactic Analysis, Indentation Engine Basics
4031 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4032 @section Syntactic Symbols
4033 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4034
4035 @cindex syntactic symbols, brief list
4036 @vindex c-offsets-alist
4037 @vindex offsets-alist (c-)
4038 This section is a complete list of the syntactic symbols which appear
4039 in the @code{c-offsets-alist} style variable, along with brief
4040 descriptions. The previous section (@pxref{Syntactic Analysis})
4041 states what syntactic symbols are and how the indentation engine uses
4042 them.
4043
4044 More detailed descriptions of these symbols, together with snippets of
4045 source code to which they apply, appear in the examples in the
4046 subsections below. Note that, in the interests of brevity, the anchor
4047 position associated with most syntactic symbols is @emph{not}
4048 specified. In cases of doubt, type @kbd{C-c C-s} on a pertinent
4049 line---this highlights the anchor position.
4050
4051 @ssindex -open symbols
4052 @ssindex -close symbols
4053 @ssindex -block-intro symbols
4054 The syntactic symbols which indicate brace constructs follow a general
4055 naming convention. When a line begins with an open or close brace,
4056 its syntactic symbol will contain the suffix @code{-open} or
4057 @code{-close} respectively. The first line within the brace block
4058 construct will contain the suffix @code{-block-intro}.
4059
4060 @ssindex -intro symbols
4061 @ssindex -cont symbols
4062 In constructs which can span several lines, a distinction is usually
4063 made between the first line that introduces the construct and the
4064 lines that continue it. The syntactic symbols that indicate these
4065 lines will contain the suffixes @code{-intro} or @code{-cont}
4066 respectively.
4067
4068 The best way to understand how all this works is by looking at some
4069 examples. Remember that you can see the syntax of any source code
4070 line by using @kbd{C-c C-s}.
4071
4072 @table @code
4073 @item string
4074 Inside a multiline string. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
4075 @item c
4076 Inside a multiline C style block comment. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
4077 @item defun-open
4078 Brace that opens a top-level function definition. @ref{Function
4079 Symbols}.
4080 @item defun-close
4081 Brace that closes a top-level function definition. @ref{Function
4082 Symbols}.
4083 @item defun-block-intro
4084 The first line in a top-level defun. @ref{Function Symbols}.
4085 @item class-open
4086 Brace that opens a class definition. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4087 @item class-close
4088 Brace that closes a class definition. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4089 @item inline-open
4090 Brace that opens an in-class inline method. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4091 @item inline-close
4092 Brace that closes an in-class inline method. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4093 @item func-decl-cont
4094 The region between a function definition's argument list and the
4095 function opening brace (excluding K&R argument declarations). In C,
4096 you cannot put anything but whitespace and comments in this region,
4097 however in C++ and Java, @code{throws} declarations and other things
4098 can appear here. @ref{Literal Symbols}. @c @emph{FIXME!!! Can it not
4099 @c go somewhere better?}
4100 @item knr-argdecl-intro
4101 First line of a K&R C argument declaration. @ref{K&R Symbols}.
4102 @item knr-argdecl
4103 Subsequent lines in a K&R C argument declaration. @ref{K&R Symbols}.
4104 @item topmost-intro
4105 The first line in a ``topmost'' definition. @ref{Function Symbols}.
4106 @item topmost-intro-cont
4107 Topmost definition continuation lines. This is only used in the parts
4108 that aren't covered by other symbols such as @code{func-decl-cont} and
4109 @code{knr-argdecl}. @ref{Function Symbols}.
4110 @item annotation-top-cont
4111 Topmost definition continuation lines where all previous items are
4112 annotations. @ref{Java Symbols}.
4113 @item member-init-intro
4114 First line in a member initialization list. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4115 @item member-init-cont
4116 Subsequent member initialization list lines. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4117 @item inher-intro
4118 First line of a multiple inheritance list. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4119 @item inher-cont
4120 Subsequent multiple inheritance lines. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4121 @item block-open
4122 Statement block open brace. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
4123 @item block-close
4124 Statement block close brace. @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}.
4125 @item brace-list-open
4126 Open brace of an enum or static array list. @ref{Brace List Symbols}.
4127 @item brace-list-close
4128 Close brace of an enum or static array list. @ref{Brace List Symbols}.
4129 @item brace-list-intro
4130 First line in an enum or static array list. @ref{Brace List Symbols}.
4131 @item brace-list-entry
4132 Subsequent lines in an enum or static array list. @ref{Brace List
4133 Symbols}.
4134 @item brace-entry-open
4135 Subsequent lines in an enum or static array list where the line begins
4136 with an open brace. @ref{Brace List Symbols}.
4137 @item statement
4138 A statement. @ref{Function Symbols}.
4139 @item statement-cont
4140 A continuation of a statement. @ref{Function Symbols}.
4141 @item annotation-var-cont
4142 A continuation of a statement where all previous items are
4143 annotations. @ref{Java Symbols}.
4144 @item statement-block-intro
4145 The first line in a new statement block. @ref{Conditional Construct
4146 Symbols}.
4147 @item statement-case-intro
4148 The first line in a case block. @ref{Switch Statement Symbols}.
4149 @item statement-case-open
4150 The first line in a case block that starts with a brace. @ref{Switch
4151 Statement Symbols}.
4152 @item substatement
4153 The first line after a conditional or loop construct.
4154 @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}.
4155 @item substatement-open
4156 The brace that opens a substatement block. @ref{Conditional Construct
4157 Symbols}.
4158 @item substatement-label
4159 The first line after a conditional or loop construct if it's a label.
4160 @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}.
4161 @item case-label
4162 A label in a @code{switch} block. @ref{Switch Statement Symbols}.
4163 @item access-label
4164 C++ access control label. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4165 @item label
4166 Any other label. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
4167 @item do-while-closure
4168 The @code{while} line that ends a @code{do}-@code{while} construct.
4169 @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}.
4170 @item else-clause
4171 The @code{else} line of an @code{if}-@code{else} construct.
4172 @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}.
4173 @item catch-clause
4174 The @code{catch} or @code{finally} (in Java) line of a
4175 @code{try}-@code{catch} construct. @ref{Conditional Construct
4176 Symbols}.
4177 @item comment-intro
4178 A line containing only a comment introduction. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
4179 @item arglist-intro
4180 The first line in an argument list. @ref{Paren List Symbols}.
4181 @item arglist-cont
4182 Subsequent argument list lines when no arguments follow on the same
4183 line as the arglist opening paren. @ref{Paren List Symbols}.
4184 @item arglist-cont-nonempty
4185 Subsequent argument list lines when at least one argument follows on
4186 the same line as the arglist opening paren. @ref{Paren List Symbols}.
4187 @item arglist-close
4188 The solo close paren of an argument list. @ref{Paren List Symbols}.
4189 @item stream-op
4190 Lines continuing a stream operator (C++ only). @ref{Literal
4191 Symbols}. @c @emph{FIXME!!! Can this not be moved somewhere better?}
4192 @item inclass
4193 The line is nested inside a class definition. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4194 @item cpp-macro
4195 The start of a preprocessor macro definition. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
4196 @item cpp-define-intro
4197 The first line inside a multiline preprocessor macro if
4198 @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} is set. @ref{Multiline Macro
4199 Symbols}.
4200 @item cpp-macro-cont
4201 All lines inside multiline preprocessor macros if
4202 @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} is @code{nil}.
4203 @ref{Multiline Macro Symbols}.
4204 @item friend
4205 A C++ friend declaration. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4206 @item objc-method-intro
4207 The first line of an Objective-C method definition. @ref{Objective-C
4208 Method Symbols}.
4209 @item objc-method-args-cont
4210 Lines continuing an Objective-C method definition. @ref{Objective-C
4211 Method Symbols}.
4212 @item objc-method-call-cont
4213 Lines continuing an Objective-C method call. @ref{Objective-C Method
4214 Symbols}.
4215 @item extern-lang-open
4216 Brace that opens an @code{extern} block (e.g., @code{extern "C"
4217 @{...@}}). @ref{External Scope Symbols}.
4218 @item extern-lang-close
4219 Brace that closes an @code{extern} block. @ref{External Scope
4220 Symbols}.
4221 @item inextern-lang
4222 Analogous to @code{inclass} syntactic symbol, but used inside
4223 @code{extern} blocks. @ref{External Scope Symbols}.
4224 @item namespace-open
4225 @itemx namespace-close
4226 @itemx innamespace
4227 These are analogous to the three @code{extern-lang} symbols above, but
4228 are returned for C++ namespace blocks. @ref{External Scope Symbols}.
4229 @item module-open
4230 @itemx module-close
4231 @itemx inmodule
4232 Analogous to the above, but for CORBA IDL @code{module} blocks.
4233 @ref{External Scope Symbols}.
4234 @item composition-open
4235 @itemx composition-close
4236 @itemx incomposition
4237 Analogous to the above, but for CORBA CIDL @code{composition} blocks.
4238 @ref{External Scope Symbols}.
4239 @item template-args-cont
4240 C++ template argument list continuations. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4241 @item inlambda
4242 Analogous to @code{inclass} syntactic symbol, but used inside lambda
4243 (i.e., anonymous) functions. Only used in Pike mode. @ref{Statement
4244 Block Symbols}.
4245 @item lambda-intro-cont
4246 Lines continuing the header of a lambda function, i.e., between the
4247 @code{lambda} keyword and the function body. Only used in Pike mode.
4248 @ref{Statement Block Symbols}.
4249 @item inexpr-statement
4250 A statement block inside an expression. The gcc C and C++ extension
4251 for this is recognized. It's also used for the special functions that
4252 take a statement block as an argument in Pike. @ref{Statement Block
4253 Symbols}.
4254 @item inexpr-class
4255 A class definition inside an expression. This is used for anonymous
4256 classes in Java. It's also used for anonymous array initializers in
4257 Java. @ref{Java Symbols}.
4258 @end table
4259
4260 @menu
4261 * Function Symbols::
4262 * Class Symbols::
4263 * Conditional Construct Symbols::
4264 * Switch Statement Symbols::
4265 * Brace List Symbols::
4266 * External Scope Symbols::
4267 * Paren List Symbols::
4268 * Literal Symbols::
4269 * Multiline Macro Symbols::
4270 * Objective-C Method Symbols::
4271 * Java Symbols::
4272 * Statement Block Symbols::
4273 * K&R Symbols::
4274 @end menu
4275
4276 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4277 @node Function Symbols, Class Symbols, Syntactic Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4278 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4279 @subsection Function Symbols
4280 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4281
4282 This example shows a typical function declaration.
4283
4284 @example
4285 1: void
4286 2: swap( int& a, int& b )
4287 3: @{
4288 4: int tmp = a;
4289 5: a = b;
4290 6: b = tmp;
4291 7: int ignored =
4292 8: a + b;
4293 9: @}
4294 @end example
4295
4296 @ssindex topmost-intro
4297 @ssindex topmost-intro-cont
4298 @ssindex defun-open
4299 @ssindex defun-close
4300 @ssindex defun-block-intro
4301 Line 1 shows a @code{topmost-intro} since it is the first line that
4302 introduces a top-level construct. Line 2 is a continuation of the
4303 top-level construct introduction so it has the syntax
4304 @code{topmost-intro-cont}. Line 3 shows a @code{defun-open} since it is
4305 the brace that opens a top-level function definition. Line 9 is the
4306 corresponding
4307 @code{defun-close} since it contains the brace that closes the top-level
4308 function definition. Line 4 is a @code{defun-block-intro}, i.e., it is
4309 the first line of a brace-block, enclosed in a
4310 top-level function definition.
4311
4312 @ssindex statement
4313 @ssindex statement-cont
4314 Lines 5, 6, and 7 are all given @code{statement} syntax since there
4315 isn't much special about them. Note however that line 8 is given
4316 @code{statement-cont} syntax since it continues the statement begun
4317 on the previous line.
4318
4319 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4320 @node Class Symbols, Conditional Construct Symbols, Function Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4321 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4322 @subsection Class related Symbols
4323 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4324
4325 Here's an example which illustrates some C++ class syntactic symbols:
4326
4327 @example
4328 1: class Bass
4329 2: : public Guitar,
4330 3: public Amplifiable
4331 4: @{
4332 5: public:
4333 6: Bass()
4334 7: : eString( new BassString( 0.105 )),
4335 8: aString( new BassString( 0.085 )),
4336 9: dString( new BassString( 0.065 )),
4337 10: gString( new BassString( 0.045 ))
4338 11: @{
4339 12: eString.tune( 'E' );
4340 13: aString.tune( 'A' );
4341 14: dString.tune( 'D' );
4342 15: gString.tune( 'G' );
4343 16: @}
4344 17: friend class Luthier;
4345 18: @};
4346 @end example
4347
4348 @ssindex class-open
4349 @ssindex class-close
4350 As in the previous example, line 1 has the @code{topmost-intro} syntax.
4351 Here however, the brace that opens a C++ class definition on line 4 is
4352 assigned the @code{class-open} syntax. Note that in C++, classes,
4353 structs, and unions are essentially equivalent syntactically (and are
4354 very similar semantically), so replacing the @code{class} keyword in the
4355 example above with @code{struct} or @code{union} would still result in a
4356 syntax of @code{class-open} for line 4 @footnote{This is the case even
4357 for C and Objective-C@. For consistency, structs in all supported
4358 languages are syntactically equivalent to classes. Note however that
4359 the keyword @code{class} is meaningless in C and Objective-C.}.
4360 Similarly, line 18 is assigned @code{class-close} syntax.
4361
4362 @ssindex inher-intro
4363 @ssindex inher-cont
4364 Line 2 introduces the inheritance list for the class so it is assigned
4365 the @code{inher-intro} syntax, and line 3, which continues the
4366 inheritance list is given @code{inher-cont} syntax.
4367
4368 @ssindex access-label
4369 @ssindex inclass
4370 Hitting @kbd{C-c C-s} on line 5 shows the following analysis:
4371
4372 @example
4373 ((inclass 58) (access-label 58))
4374 @end example
4375
4376 @noindent
4377 The primary syntactic symbol for this line is @code{access-label} as
4378 this is a label keyword that specifies access protection in C++. However,
4379 because this line is also a top-level construct inside a class
4380 definition, the analysis actually shows two syntactic symbols. The
4381 other syntactic symbol assigned to this line is @code{inclass}.
4382 Similarly, line 6 is given both @code{inclass} and @code{topmost-intro}
4383 syntax:
4384
4385 @example
4386 ((inclass 58) (topmost-intro 60))
4387 @end example
4388
4389 @ssindex member-init-intro
4390 @ssindex member-init-cont
4391 Line 7 introduces a C++ member initialization list and as such is given
4392 @code{member-init-intro} syntax. Note that in this case it is
4393 @emph{not} assigned @code{inclass} since this is not considered a
4394 top-level construct. Lines 8 through 10 are all assigned
4395 @code{member-init-cont} since they continue the member initialization
4396 list started on line 7.
4397
4398 @cindex in-class inline methods
4399 @ssindex inline-open
4400 @ssindex inline-close
4401 Line 11's analysis is a bit more complicated:
4402
4403 @example
4404 ((inclass 58) (inline-open))
4405 @end example
4406
4407 This line is assigned a syntax of both @code{inline-open} and
4408 @code{inclass} because it opens an @dfn{in-class} C++ inline method
4409 definition. This is distinct from, but related to, the C++ notion of an
4410 inline function in that its definition occurs inside an enclosing class
4411 definition, which in C++ implies that the function should be inlined.
4412 However, if the definition of the @code{Bass} constructor appeared
4413 outside the class definition, the construct would be given the
4414 @code{defun-open} syntax, even if the keyword @code{inline} appeared
4415 before the method name, as in:
4416
4417 @example
4418 1: class Bass
4419 2: : public Guitar,
4420 3: public Amplifiable
4421 4: @{
4422 5: public:
4423 6: Bass();
4424 7: @};
4425 8:
4426 9: inline
4427 10: Bass::Bass()
4428 11: : eString( new BassString( 0.105 )),
4429 12: aString( new BassString( 0.085 )),
4430 13: dString( new BassString( 0.065 )),
4431 14: gString( new BassString( 0.045 ))
4432 15: @{
4433 16: eString.tune( 'E' );
4434 17: aString.tune( 'A' );
4435 18: dString.tune( 'D' );
4436 19: gString.tune( 'G' );
4437 20: @}
4438 @end example
4439
4440 @ssindex friend
4441 Returning to the previous example, line 16 is given @code{inline-close}
4442 syntax, while line 12 is given @code{defun-block-open} syntax, and lines
4443 13 through 15 are all given @code{statement} syntax. Line 17 is
4444 interesting in that its syntactic analysis list contains three
4445 elements:
4446
4447 @example
4448 ((inclass 58) (topmost-intro 380) (friend))
4449 @end example
4450
4451 The @code{friend} and @code{inline-open} syntactic symbols are
4452 modifiers that do not have anchor positions.
4453
4454 @ssindex template-args-cont
4455 Template definitions introduce yet another syntactic symbol:
4456
4457 @example
4458 1: ThingManager <int,
4459 2: Framework::Callback *,
4460 3: Mutex> framework_callbacks;
4461 @end example
4462
4463 Here, line 1 is analyzed as a @code{topmost-intro}, but lines 2 and 3
4464 are both analyzed as @code{template-args-cont} lines.
4465
4466 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4467 @node Conditional Construct Symbols, Switch Statement Symbols, Class Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4468 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4469 @subsection Conditional Construct Symbols
4470 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4471
4472 Here is a (totally contrived) example which illustrates how syntax is
4473 assigned to various conditional constructs:
4474
4475 @example
4476 1: void spam( int index )
4477 2: @{
4478 3: for( int i=0; i<index; i++ )
4479 4: @{
4480 5: if( i == 10 )
4481 6: do_something_special();
4482 7: else
4483 8: silly_label:
4484 9: do_something( i );
4485 10: @}
4486 11: do @{
4487 12: another_thing( i-- );
4488 13: @}
4489 14: while( i > 0 );
4490 15: @}
4491 @end example
4492
4493 Only the lines that illustrate new syntactic symbols will be discussed.
4494
4495 @ssindex substatement-open
4496 @ssindex statement-block-intro
4497 @ssindex block-close
4498 Line 4 has a brace which opens a conditional's substatement block. It
4499 is thus assigned @code{substatement-open} syntax, and since line 5 is
4500 the first line in the substatement block, it is assigned
4501 @code{statement-block-intro} syntax. Line 10 contains the brace
4502 that closes the inner substatement block, and is therefore given the
4503 syntax @code{block-close}@footnote{@code{block-open} is used only for
4504 ``free-standing'' blocks, and is somewhat rare (@pxref{Literal
4505 Symbols} for an example.)}. Line 13 is treated the same way.
4506
4507 @ssindex substatement
4508 Lines 6 and 9 are also substatements of conditionals, but since they
4509 don't start blocks they are given @code{substatement} syntax
4510 instead of @code{substatement-open}.
4511
4512 @ssindex substatement-label
4513 Line 8 contains a label, which is normally given @code{label} syntax.
4514 This one is however a bit special since it's between a conditional and
4515 its substatement. It's analyzed as @code{substatement-label} to let you
4516 handle this rather odd case differently from normal labels.
4517
4518 @ssindex else-clause
4519 @ssindex catch-clause
4520 Line 7 start with an @code{else} that matches the @code{if} statement on
4521 line 5. It is therefore given the @code{else-clause} syntax and is
4522 anchored on the matching @code{if}. The @code{try}-@code{catch}
4523 constructs in C++ and Java are treated this way too, except that
4524 @code{catch} and (in Java) @code{finally}, are marked with
4525 @code{catch-clause}.
4526
4527 @ssindex do-while-closure
4528 The @code{while} construct on line 14 that closes a @code{do}
4529 conditional is given the special syntax @code{do-while-closure} if it
4530 appears on a line by itself. Note that if the @code{while} appeared on
4531 the same line as the preceding close brace, that line would still have
4532 @code{block-close} syntax.
4533
4534 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4535 @node Switch Statement Symbols, Brace List Symbols, Conditional Construct Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4536 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4537 @subsection Switch Statement Symbols
4538 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4539
4540 Switch statements have their own set of syntactic symbols. Here's an
4541 example:
4542
4543 @example
4544 1: void spam( enum Ingredient i )
4545 2: @{
4546 3: switch( i ) @{
4547 4: case Ham:
4548 5: be_a_pig();
4549 6: break;
4550 7: case Salt:
4551 8: drink_some_water();
4552 9: break;
4553 10: default:
4554 11: @{
4555 12: what_is_it();
4556 13: break;
4557 14: @}
4558 15: @}
4559 14: @}
4560 @end example
4561
4562 @ssindex case-label
4563 @ssindex statement-case-intro
4564 @ssindex statement-case-open
4565 Here, lines 4, 7, and 10 are all assigned @code{case-label} syntax,
4566 while lines 5 and 8 are assigned @code{statement-case-intro}. Line 11
4567 is treated slightly differently since it contains a brace that opens a
4568 block; it is given @code{statement-case-open} syntax.
4569
4570 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4571 @node Brace List Symbols, External Scope Symbols, Switch Statement Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4572 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4573 @subsection Brace List Symbols
4574 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4575
4576 @cindex brace lists
4577 There are a set of syntactic symbols that are used to recognize
4578 constructs inside of brace lists. A brace list is defined as an
4579 @code{enum} or aggregate initializer list, such as might statically
4580 initialize an array of structs. The three special aggregate constructs
4581 in Pike, @code{(@{ @})}, @code{([ ])} and @code{(< >)}, are treated as
4582 brace lists too. An example:
4583
4584 @example
4585 1: static char* ingredients[] =
4586 2: @{
4587 3: "Ham",
4588 4: "Salt",
4589 5: NULL
4590 6: @};
4591 @end example
4592
4593 @ssindex brace-list-open
4594 @ssindex brace-list-intro
4595 @ssindex brace-list-close
4596 @ssindex brace-list-entry
4597 Following convention, line 2 in this example is assigned
4598 @code{brace-list-open} syntax, and line 3 is assigned
4599 @code{brace-list-intro} syntax. Likewise, line 6 is assigned
4600 @code{brace-list-close} syntax. Lines 4 and 5 however, are assigned
4601 @code{brace-list-entry} syntax, as would all subsequent lines in this
4602 initializer list.
4603
4604 @ssindex brace-entry-open
4605 Your static initializer might be initializing nested structures, for
4606 example:
4607
4608 @example
4609 1: struct intpairs[] =
4610 2: @{
4611 3: @{ 1, 2 @},
4612 4: @{
4613 5: 3,
4614 6: 4
4615 7: @}
4616 8: @{ 1,
4617 9: 2 @},
4618 10: @{ 3, 4 @}
4619 11: @};
4620 @end example
4621
4622 Here, you've already seen the analysis of lines 1, 2, 3, and 11. On
4623 line 4, things get interesting; this line is assigned
4624 @code{brace-entry-open} syntactic symbol because it's a bracelist entry
4625 line that starts with an open brace. Lines 5 and 6 (and line 9) are
4626 pretty standard, and line 7 is a @code{brace-list-close} as you'd
4627 expect. Once again, line 8 is assigned as @code{brace-entry-open} as is
4628 line 10.
4629
4630 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4631 @node External Scope Symbols, Paren List Symbols, Brace List Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4632 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4633 @subsection External Scope Symbols
4634 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4635
4636 External language definition blocks also have their own syntactic
4637 symbols. In this example:
4638
4639 @example
4640 1: extern "C"
4641 2: @{
4642 3: int thing_one( int );
4643 4: int thing_two( double );
4644 5: @}
4645 @end example
4646
4647 @ssindex extern-lang-open
4648 @ssindex extern-lang-close
4649 @ssindex inextern-lang
4650 @ssindex inclass
4651 @noindent
4652 line 2 is given the @code{extern-lang-open} syntax, while line 5 is given
4653 the @code{extern-lang-close} syntax. The analysis for line 3 yields:
4654
4655 @example
4656 ((inextern-lang) (topmost-intro 14))
4657 @end example
4658
4659 @noindent
4660 where @code{inextern-lang} is a modifier similar in purpose to
4661 @code{inclass}.
4662
4663 There are various other top level blocks like @code{extern}, and they
4664 are all treated in the same way except that the symbols are named after
4665 the keyword that introduces the block. E.g., C++ namespace blocks get
4666 the three symbols @code{namespace-open}, @code{namespace-close} and
4667 @code{innamespace}. The currently recognized top level blocks are:
4668
4669 @table @asis
4670 @item @code{extern-lang-open}, @code{extern-lang-close}, @code{inextern-lang}
4671 @code{extern} blocks in C and C++.@footnote{These should logically be
4672 named @code{extern-open}, @code{extern-close} and @code{inextern}, but
4673 that isn't the case for historical reasons.}
4674
4675 @item @code{namespace-open}, @code{namespace-close}, @code{innamespace}
4676 @ssindex namespace-open
4677 @ssindex namespace-close
4678 @ssindex innamespace
4679 @code{namespace} blocks in C++.
4680
4681 @item @code{module-open}, @code{module-close}, @code{inmodule}
4682 @ssindex module-open
4683 @ssindex module-close
4684 @ssindex inmodule
4685 @code{module} blocks in CORBA IDL.
4686
4687 @item @code{composition-open}, @code{composition-close}, @code{incomposition}
4688 @ssindex composition-open
4689 @ssindex composition-close
4690 @ssindex incomposition
4691 @code{composition} blocks in CORBA CIDL.
4692 @end table
4693
4694 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4695 @node Paren List Symbols, Literal Symbols, External Scope Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4696 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4697 @subsection Parenthesis (Argument) List Symbols
4698 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4699
4700 A number of syntactic symbols are associated with parenthesis lists,
4701 a.k.a argument lists, as found in function declarations and function
4702 calls. This example illustrates these:
4703
4704 @example
4705 1: void a_function( int line1,
4706 2: int line2 );
4707 3:
4708 4: void a_longer_function(
4709 5: int line1,
4710 6: int line2
4711 7: );
4712 8:
4713 9: void call_them( int line1, int line2 )
4714 10: @{
4715 11: a_function(
4716 12: line1,
4717 13: line2
4718 14: );
4719 15:
4720 16: a_longer_function( line1,
4721 17: line2 );
4722 18: @}
4723 @end example
4724
4725 @ssindex arglist-intro
4726 @ssindex arglist-close
4727 Lines 5 and 12 are assigned @code{arglist-intro} syntax since they are
4728 the first line following the open parenthesis, and lines 7 and 14 are
4729 assigned @code{arglist-close} syntax since they contain the parenthesis
4730 that closes the argument list.
4731
4732 @ssindex arglist-cont-nonempty
4733 @ssindex arglist-cont
4734 Lines that continue argument lists can be assigned one of two syntactic
4735 symbols. For example, Lines 2 and 17
4736 are assigned @code{arglist-cont-nonempty} syntax. What this means
4737 is that they continue an argument list, but that the line containing the
4738 parenthesis that opens the list is @emph{not empty} following the open
4739 parenthesis. Contrast this against lines 6 and 13 which are assigned
4740 @code{arglist-cont} syntax. This is because the parenthesis that opens
4741 their argument lists is the last character on that line.
4742
4743 Syntactic elements with @code{arglist-intro},
4744 @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}, and @code{arglist-close} contain two
4745 buffer positions: the anchor position (the beginning of the
4746 declaration or statement) and the position of the open parenthesis.
4747 The latter position can be used in a line-up function (@pxref{Line-Up
4748 Functions}).
4749
4750 Note that there is no @code{arglist-open} syntax. This is because any
4751 parenthesis that opens an argument list, appearing on a separate line,
4752 is assigned the @code{statement-cont} syntax instead.
4753
4754 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4755 @node Literal Symbols, Multiline Macro Symbols, Paren List Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4756 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4757 @subsection Comment String Label and Macro Symbols
4758 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4759
4760 A few miscellaneous syntactic symbols that haven't been previously
4761 covered are illustrated by this C++ example:
4762
4763 @example
4764 1: void Bass::play( int volume )
4765 2: const
4766 3: @{
4767 4: /* this line starts a multiline
4768 5: * comment. This line should get 'c' syntax */
4769 6:
4770 7: char* a_multiline_string = "This line starts a multiline \
4771 8: string. This line should get 'string' syntax.";
4772 9:
4773 10: note:
4774 11: @{
4775 12: #ifdef LOCK
4776 13: Lock acquire();
4777 14: #endif // LOCK
4778 15: slap_pop();
4779 16: cout << "I played "
4780 17: << "a note\n";
4781 18: @}
4782 19: @}
4783 @end example
4784
4785 The lines to note in this example include:
4786
4787 @itemize @bullet
4788 @item
4789 @ssindex func-decl-cont
4790 Line 2 is assigned the @code{func-decl-cont} syntax.
4791
4792 @item
4793 @ssindex comment-intro
4794 Line 4 is assigned both @code{defun-block-intro} @emph{and}
4795 @code{comment-intro} syntax. A syntactic element with
4796 @code{comment-intro} has no anchor point. It is always accompanied
4797 by another syntactic element which does have one.
4798
4799 @item
4800 @ssindex c
4801 Line 5 is assigned @code{c} syntax.
4802
4803 @item
4804 @cindex syntactic whitespace
4805 Line 6 which, even though it contains nothing but whitespace, is
4806 assigned @code{defun-block-intro}. Note that the appearance of the
4807 comment on lines 4 and 5 do not cause line 6 to be assigned
4808 @code{statement} syntax because comments are considered to be
4809 @dfn{syntactic whitespace}, which are ignored when analyzing
4810 code.
4811
4812 @item
4813 @ssindex string
4814 Line 8 is assigned @code{string} syntax.
4815
4816 @item
4817 @ssindex label
4818 Line 10 is assigned @code{label} syntax.
4819
4820 @item
4821 @ssindex block-open
4822 Line 11 is assigned @code{block-open} as well as @code{statement}
4823 syntax. A @code{block-open} syntactic element doesn't have an anchor
4824 position, since it always appears with another syntactic element which
4825 does have one.
4826
4827 @item
4828 @ssindex cpp-macro
4829 Lines 12 and 14 are assigned @code{cpp-macro} syntax in addition to the
4830 normal syntactic symbols (@code{statement-block-intro} and
4831 @code{statement}, respectively). Normally @code{cpp-macro} is
4832 configured to cancel out the normal syntactic context to make all
4833 preprocessor directives stick to the first column, but that's easily
4834 changed if you want preprocessor directives to be indented like the rest
4835 of the code. Like @code{comment-intro}, a syntactic element with
4836 @code{cpp-macro} doesn't contain an anchor position.
4837
4838 @item
4839 @ssindex stream-op
4840 Line 17 is assigned @code{stream-op} syntax.
4841 @end itemize
4842
4843 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4844 @node Multiline Macro Symbols, Objective-C Method Symbols, Literal Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4845 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4846 @subsection Multiline Macro Symbols
4847 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4848
4849 @cindex multiline macros
4850 @cindex syntactic whitespace
4851 @ssindex cpp-define-intro
4852 @ssindex cpp-macro-cont
4853 Multiline preprocessor macro definitions are normally handled just like
4854 other code, i.e., the lines inside them are indented according to the
4855 syntactic analysis of the preceding lines inside the macro. The first
4856 line inside a macro definition (i.e., the line after the starting line of
4857 the cpp directive itself) gets @code{cpp-define-intro}. In this example:
4858
4859 @example
4860 1: #define LIST_LOOP(cons, listp) \
4861 2: for (cons = listp; !NILP (cons); cons = XCDR (cons)) \
4862 3: if (!CONSP (cons)) \
4863 4: signal_error ("Invalid list format", listp); \
4864 5: else
4865 @end example
4866
4867 @noindent
4868 line 1 is given the syntactic symbol @code{cpp-macro}. The first line
4869 of a cpp directive is always given that symbol. Line 2 is given
4870 @code{cpp-define-intro}, so that you can give the macro body as a whole
4871 some extra indentation. Lines 3 through 5 are then analyzed as normal
4872 code, i.e., @code{substatement} on lines 3 and 4, and @code{else-clause}
4873 on line 5.
4874
4875 The syntactic analysis inside macros can be turned off with
4876 @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} (@pxref{Custom Macros}). In
4877 that case, lines 2 through 5 would all be given @code{cpp-macro-cont}
4878 with an anchor position pointing to the @code{#} which starts the cpp
4879 directive@footnote{This is how @ccmode{} 5.28 and earlier analyzed
4880 macros.}.
4881
4882 @xref{Custom Macros}, for more info about the treatment of macros.
4883
4884 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4885 @node Objective-C Method Symbols, Java Symbols, Multiline Macro Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4886 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4887 @subsection Objective-C Method Symbols
4888 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4889
4890 In Objective-C buffers, there are three additional syntactic symbols
4891 assigned to various message calling constructs. Here's an example
4892 illustrating these:
4893
4894 @example
4895 1: - (void)setDelegate:anObject
4896 2: withStuff:stuff
4897 3: @{
4898 4: [delegate masterWillRebind:self
4899 5: toDelegate:anObject
4900 6: withExtraStuff:stuff];
4901 7: @}
4902 @end example
4903
4904 @ssindex objc-method-intro
4905 @ssindex objc-method-args-cont
4906 @ssindex objc-method-call-cont
4907 Here, line 1 is assigned @code{objc-method-intro} syntax, and line 2 is
4908 assigned @code{objc-method-args-cont} syntax. Lines 5 and 6 are both
4909 assigned @code{objc-method-call-cont} syntax.
4910
4911 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4912 @node Java Symbols, Statement Block Symbols, Objective-C Method Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4913 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4914 @subsection Java Symbols
4915 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4916
4917 Java has a concept of anonymous classes which can look something like
4918 this:
4919
4920 @example
4921 1: @@Test
4922 2: public void watch(Observable o) @{
4923 3: @@NonNull
4924 4: Observer obs = new Observer() @{
4925 5: public void update(Observable o, Object arg) @{
4926 6: history.addElement(arg);
4927 7: @}
4928 8: @};
4929 9: o.addObserver(obs);
4930 10: @}
4931 @end example
4932
4933 @ssindex inexpr-class
4934 The brace following the @code{new} operator opens the anonymous class.
4935 Lines 5 and 8 are assigned the @code{inexpr-class} syntax, besides the
4936 @code{inclass} symbol used in normal classes. Thus, the class will be
4937 indented just like a normal class, with the added indentation given to
4938 @code{inexpr-class}. An @code{inexpr-class} syntactic element doesn't
4939 have an anchor position.
4940
4941 @ssindex annotation-top-cont
4942 @ssindex annotation-var-cont
4943 Line 2 is assigned the @code{annotation-top-cont} syntax, due to it being a
4944 continuation of a topmost introduction with an annotation symbol preceding
4945 the current line. Similarly, line 4 is assigned the @code{annotation-var-cont}
4946 syntax due to it being a continuation of a variable declaration where preceding
4947 the declaration is an annotation.
4948
4949 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4950 @node Statement Block Symbols, K&R Symbols, Java Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4951 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4952 @subsection Statement Block Symbols
4953 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4954
4955 There are a few occasions where a statement block might be used inside
4956 an expression. One is in C or C++ code using the gcc extension for
4957 this, e.g.:
4958
4959 @example
4960 1: int res = (@{
4961 2: int y = foo (); int z;
4962 3: if (y > 0) z = y; else z = - y;
4963 4: z;
4964 5: @});
4965 @end example
4966
4967 @ssindex inexpr-statement
4968 Lines 2 and 5 get the @code{inexpr-statement} syntax, besides the
4969 symbols they'd get in a normal block. Therefore, the indentation put on
4970 @code{inexpr-statement} is added to the normal statement block
4971 indentation. An @code{inexpr-statement} syntactic element doesn't
4972 contain an anchor position.
4973
4974 In Pike code, there are a few other situations where blocks occur inside
4975 statements, as illustrated here:
4976
4977 @example
4978 1: array itgob()
4979 2: @{
4980 3: string s = map (backtrace()[-2][3..],
4981 4: lambda
4982 5: (mixed arg)
4983 6: @{
4984 7: return sprintf ("%t", arg);
4985 8: @}) * ", " + "\n";
4986 9: return catch @{
4987 10: write (s + "\n");
4988 11: @};
4989 12: @}
4990 @end example
4991
4992 @ssindex inlambda
4993 @ssindex lambda-intro-cont
4994 Lines 4 through 8 contain a lambda function, which @ccmode{} recognizes
4995 by the @code{lambda} keyword. If the function argument list is put
4996 on a line of its own, as in line 5, it gets the @code{lambda-intro-cont}
4997 syntax. The function body is handled as an inline method body, with the
4998 addition of the @code{inlambda} syntactic symbol. This means that line
4999 6 gets @code{inlambda} and @code{inline-open}, and line 8 gets
5000 @code{inline-close}@footnote{You might wonder why it doesn't get
5001 @code{inlambda} too. It's because the closing brace is relative to the
5002 opening brace, which stands on its own line in this example. If the
5003 opening brace was hanging on the previous line, then the closing brace
5004 would get the @code{inlambda} syntax too to be indented correctly.}.
5005
5006 @ssindex inexpr-statement
5007 On line 9, @code{catch} is a special function taking a statement block
5008 as its argument. The block is handled as an in-expression statement
5009 with the @code{inexpr-statement} syntax, just like the gcc extended C
5010 example above. The other similar special function, @code{gauge}, is
5011 handled like this too.
5012
5013 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5014 @node K&R Symbols, , Statement Block Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
5015 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5016 @subsection K&R Symbols
5017 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5018
5019 @ssindex knr-argdecl-intro
5020 @ssindex knr-argdecl
5021 Two other syntactic symbols can appear in old style, non-prototyped C
5022 code @footnote{a.k.a.@: K&R C, or Kernighan & Ritchie C}:
5023
5024 @example
5025 1: int add_three_integers(a, b, c)
5026 2: int a;
5027 3: int b;
5028 4: int c;
5029 5: @{
5030 6: return a + b + c;
5031 7: @}
5032 @end example
5033
5034 Here, line 2 is the first line in an argument declaration list and so is
5035 given the @code{knr-argdecl-intro} syntactic symbol. Subsequent lines
5036 (i.e., lines 3 and 4 in this example), are given @code{knr-argdecl}
5037 syntax.
5038
5039
5040 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5041 @node Indentation Calculation, , Syntactic Symbols, Indentation Engine Basics
5042 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5043 @section Indentation Calculation
5044 @cindex indentation
5045 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5046
5047 Indentation for a line is calculated from the syntactic context
5048 (@pxref{Syntactic Analysis}).
5049
5050 First, a buffer position is found whose column will be the base for the
5051 indentation calculation. It's the anchor position in the first
5052 syntactic element that provides one that is used. If no syntactic
5053 element has an anchor position then column zero is used.
5054
5055 Second, the syntactic symbols in each syntactic element are looked up
5056 in the @code{c-offsets-alist} style variable
5057 (@pxref{c-offsets-alist}), which is an association list of syntactic
5058 symbols and the offsets to apply for those symbols. These offsets are
5059 added together with the base column to produce the new indentation
5060 column.
5061
5062 Let's use our two code examples above to see how this works. Here is
5063 our first example again:
5064
5065 @example
5066 1: void swap( int& a, int& b )
5067 2: @{
5068 3: int tmp = a;
5069 4: a = b;
5070 5: b = tmp;
5071 6: @}
5072 @end example
5073
5074 Let's say point is on line 3 and we hit the @key{TAB} key to reindent
5075 the line. The syntactic context for that line is:
5076
5077 @example
5078 ((defun-block-intro 29))
5079 @end example
5080
5081 @noindent
5082 Since buffer position 29 is the first and only anchor position in the
5083 list, @ccmode{} goes there and asks for the current column. This brace
5084 is in column zero, so @ccmode{} uses @samp{0} as the base column.
5085
5086 Next, @ccmode{} looks up @code{defun-block-intro} in the
5087 @code{c-offsets-alist} style variable. Let's say it finds the value
5088 @samp{4}; it adds this to the base column @samp{0}, yielding a running
5089 total indentation of 4 spaces.
5090
5091 Since there is only one syntactic element on the list for this line,
5092 indentation calculation is complete, and the total indentation for the
5093 line is 4 spaces.
5094
5095 Here's another example:
5096
5097 @example
5098 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit )
5099 2: @{
5100 3: if( doit )
5101 4: @{
5102 5: return( val + incr );
5103 6: @}
5104 7: return( val );
5105 8: @}
5106 @end example
5107
5108 If we were to hit @kbd{TAB} on line 4 in the above example, the same
5109 basic process is performed, despite the differences in the syntactic
5110 context. The context for this line is:
5111
5112 @example
5113 ((substatement-open 46))
5114 @end example
5115
5116 Here, @ccmode{} goes to buffer position 46, which is the @samp{i} in
5117 @code{if} on line 3. This character is in the fourth column on that
5118 line so the base column is @samp{4}. Then @ccmode{} looks up the
5119 @code{substatement-open} symbol in @code{c-offsets-alist}. Let's say it
5120 finds the value @samp{4}. It's added with the base column and yields an
5121 indentation for the line of 8 spaces.
5122
5123 Simple, huh?
5124
5125 Actually, it's a bit more complicated than that since the entries on
5126 @code{c-offsets-alist} can be much more than plain offsets.
5127 @xref{c-offsets-alist}, for the full story.
5128
5129 Anyway, the mode usually just does The Right Thing without you having to
5130 think about it in this much detail. But when customizing indentation,
5131 it's helpful to understand the general indentation model being used.
5132
5133 As you configure @ccmode{}, you might want to set the variable
5134 @code{c-echo-syntactic-information-p} to non-@code{nil} so that the
5135 syntactic context and calculated offset always is echoed in the
5136 minibuffer when you hit @kbd{TAB}.
5137
5138
5139 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5140 @node Customizing Indentation, Custom Macros, Indentation Engine Basics, Top
5141 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5142 @chapter Customizing Indentation
5143 @cindex customization, indentation
5144 @cindex indentation
5145 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5146
5147 The principal variable for customizing indentation is the style
5148 variable @code{c-offsets-alist}, which gives an @dfn{offset} (an
5149 indentation rule) for each syntactic symbol. Its structure and
5150 semantics are completely described in @ref{c-offsets-alist}. The
5151 various ways you can set the variable, including the use of the
5152 @ccmode{} style system, are described in @ref{Config Basics} and its
5153 sections, in particular @ref{Style Variables}.
5154
5155 The simplest and most used kind of ``offset'' setting in
5156 @code{c-offsets-alist} is in terms of multiples of
5157 @code{c-basic-offset}:
5158
5159 @defopt c-basic-offset
5160 @vindex basic-offset (c-)
5161 This style variable holds the basic offset between indentation levels.
5162 It's factory default is 4, but all the built-in styles set it
5163 themselves, to some value between 2 (for @code{gnu} style) and 8 (for
5164 @code{bsd}, @code{linux}, and @code{python} styles).
5165 @end defopt
5166
5167 The most flexible ``offset'' setting you can make in
5168 @code{c-offsets-alist} is a line-up function (or even a list of them),
5169 either one supplied by @ccmode{} (@pxref{Line-Up Functions}) or one
5170 you write yourself (@pxref{Custom Line-Up}).
5171
5172 Finally, in @ref{Other Indentation} you'll find the tool of last
5173 resort: a hook which is called after a line has been indented. You
5174 can install functions here to make ad-hoc adjustments to any line's
5175 indentation.
5176
5177 @menu
5178 * c-offsets-alist::
5179 * Interactive Customization::
5180 * Line-Up Functions::
5181 * Custom Line-Up::
5182 * Other Indentation::
5183 @end menu
5184
5185
5186 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5187 @node c-offsets-alist, Interactive Customization, Customizing Indentation, Customizing Indentation
5188 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5189 @section c-offsets-alist
5190 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5191
5192 This section explains the structure and semantics of the style
5193 variable @code{c-offsets-alist}, the principal variable for configuring
5194 indentation. Details of how to set it up, and its relationship to
5195 @ccmode{}'s style system are given in @ref{Style Variables}.
5196
5197 @defopt c-offsets-alist
5198 @vindex offsets-alist (c-)
5199 This is an alist which associates an offset with each syntactic
5200 symbol. This @dfn{offset} is a rule specifying how to indent a line
5201 whose syntactic context matches the symbol. @xref{Syntactic
5202 Analysis}.
5203
5204 Note that the buffer-local binding of this alist in a @ccmode{} buffer
5205 contains an entry for @emph{every} syntactic symbol. Its global
5206 binding and its settings within style specifications usually contain
5207 only a few entries. @xref{Style Variables}.
5208
5209 The offset specification associated with any particular syntactic
5210 symbol can be an integer, a variable name, a vector, a function or
5211 lambda expression, a list, or one of the following special symbols:
5212 @code{+}, @code{-}, @code{++}, @code{--}, @code{*}, or @code{/}. The
5213 meanings of these values are described in detail below.
5214
5215 Here is an example fragment of a @code{c-offsets-alist}, showing some
5216 of these kinds of offsets:
5217
5218 @example
5219 ((statement . 0)
5220 (substatement . +)
5221 (cpp-macro . [0])
5222 (topmost-intro-cont . c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont)
5223 (statement-block-intro . (add c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block
5224 c-indent-multi-line-block))
5225 @dots{}
5226 @*)
5227 @end example
5228 @end defopt
5229
5230 @deffn Command c-set-offset (@kbd{C-c C-o})
5231 @findex set-offset (c-)
5232 @kindex C-c C-o
5233 This command changes the entry for a syntactic symbol in the current
5234 binding of @code{c-offsets-alist}, or it inserts a new entry if there
5235 isn't already one for that syntactic symbol.
5236
5237 You can use @code{c-set-offset} interactively within a @ccmode{}
5238 buffer to make experimental changes to your indentation settings.
5239 @kbd{C-c C-o} prompts you for the syntactic symbol to change
5240 (defaulting to that of the current line) and the new offset
5241 (defaulting to the current offset).
5242
5243 @code{c-set-offset} takes two arguments when used programmatically:
5244 @var{symbol}, the syntactic element symbol to change and @var{offset},
5245 the new offset for that syntactic element. You can call the command
5246 in your @file{.emacs} to change the global binding of
5247 @code{c-offsets-alist} (@pxref{Style Variables}); you can use it in a
5248 hook function to make changes from the current style. @ccmode{}
5249 itself uses this function when initializing styles.
5250 @end deffn
5251
5252 @cindex offset specification
5253 The ``offset specifications'' in @code{c-offsets-alist} can be any of
5254 the following:
5255
5256 @table @asis
5257 @item An integer
5258 The integer specifies a relative offset. All relative
5259 offsets@footnote{The syntactic context @code{@w{((defun-block-intro
5260 2724) (comment-intro))}} would likely have two relative offsets.} will
5261 be added together and used to calculate the indentation relative to an
5262 anchor position earlier in the buffer. @xref{Indentation
5263 Calculation}, for details. Most of the time, it's probably better to
5264 use one of the special symbols like @code{+} than an integer (apart
5265 from zero).
5266
5267 @item One of the symbols @code{+}, @code{-}, @code{++}, @code{--}, @code{*}, or @code{/}
5268 These special symbols describe a relative offset in multiples of
5269 @code{c-basic-offset}:
5270
5271 By defining a style's indentation in terms of @code{c-basic-offset},
5272 you can change the amount of whitespace given to an indentation level
5273 while maintaining the same basic shape of your code. Here are the
5274 values that the special symbols correspond to:
5275
5276 @table @code
5277 @item +
5278 @code{c-basic-offset} times 1
5279 @item -
5280 @code{c-basic-offset} times @minus{}1
5281 @item ++
5282 @code{c-basic-offset} times 2
5283 @item --
5284 @code{c-basic-offset} times @minus{}2
5285 @item *
5286 @code{c-basic-offset} times 0.5
5287 @item /
5288 @code{c-basic-offset} times @minus{}0.5
5289 @end table
5290
5291 @item A vector
5292 The first element of the vector, an integer, sets the absolute
5293 indentation column. This will override any previously calculated
5294 indentation, but won't override relative indentation calculated from
5295 syntactic elements later on in the syntactic context of the line being
5296 indented. @xref{Indentation Calculation}. Any elements in the vector
5297 beyond the first will be ignored.
5298
5299 @item A function or lambda expression
5300 The function will be called and its return value will in turn be
5301 evaluated as an offset specification. Functions are useful when more
5302 context than just the syntactic symbol is needed to get the desired
5303 indentation. @xref{Line-Up Functions}, and @ref{Custom Line-Up}, for
5304 details about them.
5305
5306 @item A symbol with a variable binding
5307 If the symbol also has a function binding, the function takes
5308 precedence over the variable. Otherwise the value of the variable is
5309 used. It must be an integer (which is used as relative offset) or a
5310 vector (an absolute offset).
5311
5312 @item A list
5313 The offset can also be a list containing several offset
5314 specifications; these are evaluated recursively and combined. A list
5315 is typically only useful when some of the offsets are line-up
5316 functions. A common strategy is calling a sequence of functions in
5317 turn until one of them recognizes that it is appropriate for the
5318 source line and returns a non-@code{nil} value.
5319
5320 @code{nil} values are always ignored when the offsets are combined.
5321 The first element of the list specifies the method of combining the
5322 non-@code{nil} offsets from the remaining elements:
5323
5324 @table @code
5325 @item first
5326 Use the first offset that doesn't evaluate to @code{nil}. Subsequent
5327 elements of the list don't get evaluated.
5328 @item min
5329 Use the minimum of all the offsets. All must be either relative or
5330 absolute; they can't be mixed.
5331 @item max
5332 Use the maximum of all the offsets. All must be either relative or
5333 absolute; they can't be mixed.
5334 @item add
5335 Add all the evaluated offsets together. Exactly one of them may be
5336 absolute, in which case the result is absolute. Any relative offsets
5337 that preceded the absolute one in the list will be ignored in that case.
5338 @end table
5339
5340 As a compatibility measure, if the first element is none of the above
5341 then it too will be taken as an offset specification and the whole list
5342 will be combined according to the method @code{first}.
5343 @end table
5344
5345 @vindex c-strict-syntax-p
5346 @vindex strict-syntax-p (c-)
5347 If an offset specification evaluates to @code{nil}, then a relative
5348 offset of 0 (zero) is used@footnote{There is however a variable
5349 @code{c-strict-syntax-p} that when set to non-@code{nil} will cause an
5350 error to be signaled in that case. It's now considered obsolete since
5351 it doesn't work well with some of the alignment functions that return
5352 @code{nil} instead of zero. You should therefore leave
5353 @code{c-strict-syntax-p} set to @code{nil}.}.
5354
5355 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5356 @node Interactive Customization, Line-Up Functions, c-offsets-alist, Customizing Indentation
5357 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5358 @section Interactive Customization
5359 @cindex customization, interactive
5360 @cindex interactive customization
5361 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5362
5363 As an example of how to customize indentation, let's change the
5364 style of this example@footnote{In this and subsequent examples, the
5365 original code is formatted using the @samp{gnu} style unless otherwise
5366 indicated. @xref{Styles}.}:
5367
5368 @example
5369 @group
5370 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit )
5371 2: @{
5372 3: if( doit )
5373 4: @{
5374 5: return( val + incr );
5375 6: @}
5376 7: return( val );
5377 8: @}
5378 @end group
5379 @end example
5380
5381 @noindent
5382 to:
5383
5384 @example
5385 @group
5386 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit )
5387 2: @{
5388 3: if( doit )
5389 4: @{
5390 5: return( val + incr );
5391 6: @}
5392 7: return( val );
5393 8: @}
5394 @end group
5395 @end example
5396
5397 In other words, we want to change the indentation of braces that open a
5398 block following a condition so that the braces line up under the
5399 conditional, instead of being indented. Notice that the construct we
5400 want to change starts on line 4. To change the indentation of a line,
5401 we need to see which syntactic symbols affect the offset calculations
5402 for that line. Hitting @kbd{C-c C-s} on line 4 yields:
5403
5404 @example
5405 ((substatement-open 44))
5406 @end example
5407
5408 @noindent
5409 so we know that to change the offset of the open brace, we need to
5410 change the indentation for the @code{substatement-open} syntactic
5411 symbol.
5412
5413 To do this interactively, just hit @kbd{C-c C-o}. This prompts
5414 you for the syntactic symbol to change, providing a reasonable default.
5415 In this case, the default is @code{substatement-open}, which is just the
5416 syntactic symbol we want to change!
5417
5418 After you hit return, @ccmode{} will then prompt you for the new
5419 offset value, with the old value as the default. The default in this
5420 case is @samp{+}, but we want no extra indentation so enter
5421 @samp{0} and @kbd{RET}. This will associate the offset 0 with the
5422 syntactic symbol @code{substatement-open}.
5423
5424 To check your changes quickly, just hit @kbd{C-c C-q}
5425 (@code{c-indent-defun}) to reindent the entire function. The example
5426 should now look like:
5427
5428 @example
5429 @group
5430 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit )
5431 2: @{
5432 3: if( doit )
5433 4: @{
5434 5: return( val + incr );
5435 6: @}
5436 7: return( val );
5437 8: @}
5438 @end group
5439 @end example
5440
5441 Notice how just changing the open brace offset on line 4 is all we
5442 needed to do. Since the other affected lines are indented relative to
5443 line 4, they are automatically indented the way you'd expect. For more
5444 complicated examples, this might not always work. The general approach
5445 to take is to always start adjusting offsets for lines higher up in the
5446 file, then reindent and see if any following lines need further
5447 adjustments.
5448
5449 @c Move this bit to "Styles" (2005/10/7)
5450 @deffn Command c-set-offset symbol offset
5451 @findex set-offset (c-)
5452 @kindex C-c C-o
5453 This is the command bound to @kbd{C-c C-o}. It provides a convenient
5454 way to set offsets on @code{c-offsets-alist} both interactively (see
5455 the example above) and from your mode hook.
5456
5457 It takes two arguments when used programmatically: @var{symbol} is the
5458 syntactic element symbol to change and @var{offset} is the new offset
5459 for that syntactic element.
5460 @end deffn
5461 @c End of MOVE THIS BIT.
5462
5463 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5464 @node Line-Up Functions, Custom Line-Up, Interactive Customization, Customizing Indentation
5465 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5466 @section Line-Up Functions
5467 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5468
5469 @cindex line-up function
5470 @cindex indentation function
5471 Often there are cases when a simple offset setting on a syntactic
5472 symbol isn't enough to get the desired indentation---for example, you
5473 might want to line up a closing parenthesis with the matching opening
5474 one rather than indenting relative to its ``anchor point''. @ccmode{}
5475 provides this flexibility with @dfn{line-up functions}.
5476
5477 The way you associate a line-up function with a syntactic symbol is
5478 described in @ref{c-offsets-alist}. @ccmode{} comes with many
5479 predefined line-up functions for common situations. If none of these
5480 does what you want, you can write your own. @xref{Custom Line-Up}.
5481 Sometimes, it is easier to tweak the standard indentation by adding a
5482 function to @code{c-special-indent-hook} (@pxref{Other Indentation}).
5483
5484 The line-up functions haven't been adapted for AWK buffers or tested
5485 with them. Some of them might work serendipitously. There shouldn't be
5486 any problems writing custom line-up functions for AWK mode.
5487
5488 The calling convention for line-up functions is described fully in
5489 @ref{Custom Line-Up}. Roughly speaking, the return value is either an
5490 offset itself (such as @code{+} or @code{[0]}) or it's @code{nil},
5491 meaning ``this function is inappropriate in this case; try a
5492 different one''. @xref{c-offsets-alist}.
5493
5494 The subsections below describe all the standard line-up functions,
5495 categorized by the sort of token the lining-up centers around. For
5496 each of these functions there is a ``works with'' list that indicates
5497 which syntactic symbols the function is intended to be used with.
5498
5499 @macro workswith
5500 @emph{Works with:@ }
5501 @end macro
5502 @ifinfo
5503 @unmacro workswith
5504 @macro workswith
5505 Works with:
5506 @end macro
5507 @end ifinfo
5508
5509 @macro sssTBasicOffset
5510 <--> @i{c-basic-offset}@c
5511 @end macro
5512
5513 @macro sssTsssTBasicOffset
5514 <--><--> @i{c-basic-offset}@c
5515 @end macro
5516
5517 @macro hereFn{func}
5518 <- @i{\func\}@c
5519 @end macro
5520
5521 @c The TeX backend seems to insert extra spaces around the argument. :P
5522 @iftex
5523 @unmacro hereFn
5524 @macro hereFn{func}
5525 <-@i{\func\}@c
5526 @end macro
5527 @end iftex
5528
5529 @menu
5530 * Brace/Paren Line-Up::
5531 * List Line-Up::
5532 * Operator Line-Up::
5533 * Comment Line-Up::
5534 * Misc Line-Up::
5535 @end menu
5536
5537 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5538 @node Brace/Paren Line-Up, List Line-Up, Line-Up Functions, Line-Up Functions
5539 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5540 @subsection Brace and Parenthesis Line-Up Functions
5541 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5542
5543 The line-up functions here calculate the indentation for braces,
5544 parentheses and statements within brace blocks.
5545
5546 @defun c-lineup-close-paren
5547 @findex lineup-close-paren (c-)
5548 Line up the closing paren under its corresponding open paren if the
5549 open paren is followed by code. If the open paren ends its line, no
5550 indentation is added. E.g.:
5551
5552 @example
5553 @group
5554 main (int,
5555 char **
5556 ) @hereFn{c-lineup-close-paren}
5557 @end group
5558 @end example
5559
5560 @noindent
5561 and
5562
5563 @example
5564 @group
5565 main (
5566 int, char **
5567 ) @hereFn{c-lineup-close-paren}
5568 @end group
5569 @end example
5570
5571 As a special case, if a brace block is opened at the same line as the
5572 open parenthesis of the argument list, the indentation is
5573 @code{c-basic-offset} instead of the open paren column. See
5574 @code{c-lineup-arglist} for further discussion of this ``DWIM'' measure.
5575
5576 @workswith All @code{*-close} symbols.
5577 @end defun
5578
5579 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5580
5581 @anchor{c-lineup-arglist-close-under-paren}
5582 @defun c-lineup-arglist-close-under-paren
5583 @findex lineup-arglist-close-under-paren (c-)
5584 Set your @code{arglist-close} syntactic symbol to this line-up function
5585 so that parentheses that close argument lists will line up under the
5586 parenthesis that opened the argument list. It can also be used with
5587 @code{arglist-cont} and @code{arglist-cont-nonempty} to line up all
5588 lines inside a parenthesis under the open paren.
5589
5590 As a special case, if a brace block is opened at the same line as the
5591 open parenthesis of the argument list, the indentation is
5592 @code{c-basic-offset} only. See @code{c-lineup-arglist} for further
5593 discussion of this ``DWIM'' measure.
5594
5595 @workswith Almost all symbols, but are typically most useful on
5596 @code{arglist-close}, @code{brace-list-close}, @code{arglist-cont} and
5597 @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
5598 @end defun
5599
5600 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5601
5602 @defun c-indent-one-line-block
5603 @findex indent-one-line-block (c-)
5604 Indent a one line block @code{c-basic-offset} extra. E.g.:
5605
5606 @example
5607 @group
5608 if (n > 0)
5609 @{m+=n; n=0;@} @hereFn{c-indent-one-line-block}
5610 @sssTBasicOffset{}
5611 @end group
5612 @end example
5613
5614 @noindent
5615 and
5616
5617 @example
5618 @group
5619 if (n > 0)
5620 @{ @hereFn{c-indent-one-line-block}
5621 m+=n; n=0;
5622 @}
5623 @end group
5624 @end example
5625
5626 The block may be surrounded by any kind of parenthesis characters.
5627 @code{nil} is returned if the line doesn't start with a one line block,
5628 which makes the function usable in list expressions.
5629
5630 @workswith Almost all syntactic symbols, but most useful on the
5631 @code{-open} symbols.
5632 @end defun
5633
5634 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5635
5636 @defun c-indent-multi-line-block
5637 @findex indent-multi-line-block (c-)
5638 Indent a multiline block @code{c-basic-offset} extra. E.g.:
5639
5640 @example
5641 @group
5642 int *foo[] = @{
5643 NULL,
5644 @{17@}, @hereFn{c-indent-multi-line-block}
5645 @end group
5646 @end example
5647
5648 @noindent
5649 and
5650
5651 @example
5652 @group
5653 int *foo[] = @{
5654 NULL,
5655 @{ @hereFn{c-indent-multi-line-block}
5656 17
5657 @},
5658 @sssTBasicOffset{}
5659 @end group
5660 @end example
5661
5662 The block may be surrounded by any kind of parenthesis characters.
5663 @code{nil} is returned if the line doesn't start with a multiline
5664 block, which makes the function usable in list expressions.
5665
5666 @workswith Almost all syntactic symbols, but most useful on the
5667 @code{-open} symbols.
5668 @end defun
5669
5670 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5671
5672 @defun c-lineup-runin-statements
5673 @findex lineup-runin-statements (c-)
5674 Line up statements for coding standards which place the first statement
5675 in a block on the same line as the block opening brace@footnote{Run-in
5676 style doesn't really work too well. You might need to write your own
5677 custom line-up functions to better support this style.}. E.g.:
5678
5679 @example
5680 @group
5681 int main()
5682 @{ puts ("Hello!");
5683 return 0; @hereFn{c-lineup-runin-statements}
5684 @}
5685 @end group
5686 @end example
5687
5688 If there is no statement after the opening brace to align with,
5689 @code{nil} is returned. This makes the function usable in list
5690 expressions.
5691
5692 @workswith The @code{statement} syntactic symbol.
5693 @end defun
5694
5695 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5696
5697 @defun c-lineup-inexpr-block
5698 @findex lineup-inexpr-block (c-)
5699 This can be used with the in-expression block symbols to indent the
5700 whole block to the column where the construct is started. E.g., for Java
5701 anonymous classes, this lines up the class under the @samp{new} keyword,
5702 and in Pike it lines up the lambda function body under the @samp{lambda}
5703 keyword. Returns @code{nil} if the block isn't part of such a
5704 construct.
5705
5706 @workswith @code{inlambda}, @code{inexpr-statement},
5707 @code{inexpr-class}.
5708 @end defun
5709
5710 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5711
5712 @defun c-lineup-after-whitesmith-blocks
5713 @findex lineup-after-whitesmith-blocks (c-)
5714 Compensate for Whitesmith style indentation of blocks. Due to the way
5715 @ccmode{} calculates anchor positions for normal lines inside blocks,
5716 this function is necessary for those lines to get correct Whitesmith
5717 style indentation. Consider the following examples:
5718
5719 @example
5720 @group
5721 int foo()
5722 @{
5723 a;
5724 x; @hereFn{c-lineup-after-whitesmith-blocks}
5725 @end group
5726 @end example
5727
5728 @example
5729 @group
5730 int foo()
5731 @{
5732 @{
5733 a;
5734 @}
5735 x; @hereFn{c-lineup-after-whitesmith-blocks}
5736 @end group
5737 @end example
5738
5739 The fact that the line with @code{x} is preceded by a Whitesmith style
5740 indented block in the latter case and not the first should not affect
5741 its indentation. But since CC Mode in cases like this uses the
5742 indentation of the preceding statement as anchor position, the @code{x}
5743 would in the second case be indented too much if the offset for
5744 @code{statement} was set simply to zero.
5745
5746 This lineup function corrects for this situation by detecting if the
5747 anchor position is at an open paren character. In that case, it instead
5748 indents relative to the surrounding block just like
5749 @code{c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block}.
5750
5751 @workswith @code{brace-list-entry}, @code{brace-entry-open},
5752 @code{statement}, @code{arglist-cont}.
5753 @end defun
5754
5755 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5756
5757 @defun c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block
5758 @findex lineup-whitesmith-in-block (c-)
5759 Line up lines inside a block in Whitesmith style. It's done in a way
5760 that works both when the opening brace hangs and when it doesn't. E.g.:
5761
5762 @example
5763 @group
5764 something
5765 @{
5766 foo; @hereFn{c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block}
5767 @}
5768 @end group
5769 @end example
5770
5771 @noindent
5772 and
5773
5774 @example
5775 @group
5776 something @{
5777 foo; @hereFn{c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block}
5778 @}
5779 @sssTBasicOffset{}
5780 @end group
5781 @end example
5782
5783 In the first case the indentation is kept unchanged, in the second
5784 @code{c-basic-offset} is added.
5785
5786 @workswith @code{defun-close}, @code{defun-block-intro},
5787 @code{inline-close}, @code{block-close}, @code{brace-list-close},
5788 @code{brace-list-intro}, @code{statement-block-intro},
5789 @code{arglist-intro}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty},
5790 @code{arglist-close}, and all @code{in*} symbols, e.g., @code{inclass}
5791 and @code{inextern-lang}.
5792 @end defun
5793
5794 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5795 @node List Line-Up, Operator Line-Up, Brace/Paren Line-Up, Line-Up Functions
5796 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5797 @subsection List Line-Up Functions
5798 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5799
5800 The line-up functions here calculate the indentation for lines which
5801 form lists of items, usually separated by commas.
5802
5803 The function @ref{c-lineup-arglist-close-under-paren}, which is mainly
5804 for indenting a close parenthesis, is also useful for the lines
5805 contained within parentheses.
5806
5807 @defun c-lineup-arglist
5808 @findex lineup-arglist (c-)
5809 Line up the current argument line under the first argument.
5810
5811 As a special case, if an argument on the same line as the open
5812 parenthesis starts with a brace block opener, the indentation is
5813 @code{c-basic-offset} only. This is intended as a ``DWIM'' measure in
5814 cases like macros that contain statement blocks, e.g.:
5815
5816 @example
5817 @group
5818 A_VERY_LONG_MACRO_NAME (@{
5819 some (code, with + long, lines * in[it]);
5820 @});
5821 @sssTBasicOffset{}
5822 @end group
5823 @end example
5824
5825 This is motivated partly because it's more in line with how code
5826 blocks are handled, and partly since it approximates the behavior of
5827 earlier CC Mode versions, which due to inaccurate analysis tended to
5828 indent such cases this way.
5829
5830 @workswith @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}, @code{arglist-close}.
5831 @end defun
5832
5833 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5834
5835 @defun c-lineup-arglist-intro-after-paren
5836 @findex lineup-arglist-intro-after-paren (c-)
5837 Line up a line to just after the open paren of the surrounding paren or
5838 brace block.
5839
5840 @workswith @code{defun-block-intro}, @code{brace-list-intro},
5841 @code{statement-block-intro}, @code{statement-case-intro},
5842 @code{arglist-intro}.
5843 @end defun
5844
5845 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5846
5847 @defun c-lineup-multi-inher
5848 @findex lineup-multi-inher (c-)
5849 Line up the classes in C++ multiple inheritance clauses and member
5850 initializers under each other. E.g.:
5851
5852 @example
5853 @group
5854 Foo::Foo (int a, int b):
5855 Cyphr (a),
5856 Bar (b) @hereFn{c-lineup-multi-inher}
5857 @end group
5858 @end example
5859
5860 @noindent
5861 and
5862
5863 @example
5864 @group
5865 class Foo
5866 : public Cyphr,
5867 public Bar @hereFn{c-lineup-multi-inher}
5868 @end group
5869 @end example
5870
5871 @noindent
5872 and
5873
5874 @example
5875 @group
5876 Foo::Foo (int a, int b)
5877 : Cyphr (a)
5878 , Bar (b) @hereFn{c-lineup-multi-inher}
5879 @end group
5880 @end example
5881
5882 @workswith @code{inher-cont}, @code{member-init-cont}.
5883 @end defun
5884
5885 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5886
5887 @defun c-lineup-java-inher
5888 @findex lineup-java-inher (c-)
5889 Line up Java implements and extends declarations. If class names
5890 follow on the same line as the @samp{implements}/@samp{extends}
5891 keyword, they are lined up under each other. Otherwise, they are
5892 indented by adding @code{c-basic-offset} to the column of the keyword.
5893 E.g.:
5894
5895 @example
5896 @group
5897 class Foo
5898 extends
5899 Bar @hereFn{c-lineup-java-inher}
5900 @sssTBasicOffset{}
5901 @end group
5902 @end example
5903
5904 @noindent
5905 and
5906
5907 @example
5908 @group
5909 class Foo
5910 extends Cyphr,
5911 Bar @hereFn{c-lineup-java-inher}
5912 @end group
5913 @end example
5914
5915 @workswith @code{inher-cont}.
5916 @end defun
5917
5918 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5919
5920 @defun c-lineup-java-throws
5921 @findex lineup-java-throws (c-)
5922 Line up Java throws declarations. If exception names follow on the
5923 same line as the throws keyword, they are lined up under each other.
5924 Otherwise, they are indented by adding @code{c-basic-offset} to the
5925 column of the @samp{throws} keyword. The @samp{throws} keyword itself
5926 is also indented by @code{c-basic-offset} from the function declaration
5927 start if it doesn't hang. E.g.:
5928
5929 @example
5930 @group
5931 int foo()
5932 throws @hereFn{c-lineup-java-throws}
5933 Bar @hereFn{c-lineup-java-throws}
5934 @sssTsssTBasicOffset{}
5935 @end group
5936 @end example
5937
5938 @noindent
5939 and
5940
5941 @example
5942 @group
5943 int foo() throws Cyphr,
5944 Bar, @hereFn{c-lineup-java-throws}
5945 Vlod @hereFn{c-lineup-java-throws}
5946 @end group
5947 @end example
5948
5949 @workswith @code{func-decl-cont}.
5950 @end defun
5951
5952 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5953
5954 @defun c-lineup-template-args
5955 @findex lineup-template-args (c-)
5956 Line up the arguments of a template argument list under each other, but
5957 only in the case where the first argument is on the same line as the
5958 opening @samp{<}.
5959
5960 To allow this function to be used in a list expression, @code{nil} is
5961 returned if there's no template argument on the first line.
5962
5963 @workswith @code{template-args-cont}.
5964 @end defun
5965
5966 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5967
5968 @defun c-lineup-ObjC-method-call
5969 @findex lineup-ObjC-method-call (c-)
5970 For Objective-C code, line up selector args as Emacs Lisp mode does
5971 with function args: go to the position right after the message receiver,
5972 and if you are at the end of the line, indent the current line
5973 c-basic-offset columns from the opening bracket; otherwise you are
5974 looking at the first character of the first method call argument, so
5975 lineup the current line with it.
5976
5977 @workswith @code{objc-method-call-cont}.
5978 @end defun
5979
5980 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5981
5982 @defun c-lineup-ObjC-method-args
5983 @findex lineup-ObjC-method-args (c-)
5984 For Objective-C code, line up the colons that separate args. The colon
5985 on the current line is aligned with the one on the first line.
5986
5987 @workswith @code{objc-method-args-cont}.
5988 @end defun
5989
5990 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5991
5992 @defun c-lineup-ObjC-method-args-2
5993 @findex lineup-ObjC-method-args-2 (c-)
5994 Similar to @code{c-lineup-ObjC-method-args} but lines up the colon on
5995 the current line with the colon on the previous line.
5996
5997 @workswith @code{objc-method-args-cont}.
5998 @end defun
5999
6000 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6001 @node Operator Line-Up, Comment Line-Up, List Line-Up, Line-Up Functions
6002 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6003 @subsection Operator Line-Up Functions
6004 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6005
6006 The line-up functions here calculate the indentation for lines which
6007 start with an operator, by lining it up with something on the previous
6008 line.
6009
6010 @defun c-lineup-argcont
6011 @findex lineup-argcont (c-)
6012 Line up a continued argument. E.g.:
6013
6014 @example
6015 @group
6016 foo (xyz, aaa + bbb + ccc
6017 + ddd + eee + fff); @hereFn{c-lineup-argcont}
6018 @end group
6019 @end example
6020
6021 Only continuation lines like this are touched, @code{nil} is returned on
6022 lines which are the start of an argument.
6023
6024 Within a gcc @code{asm} block, @code{:} is recognized as an argument
6025 separator, but of course only between operand specifications, not in the
6026 expressions for the operands.
6027
6028 @workswith @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6029 @end defun
6030
6031 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6032
6033 @defun c-lineup-arglist-operators
6034 @findex lineup-arglist-operators (c-)
6035 Line up lines starting with an infix operator under the open paren.
6036 Return @code{nil} on lines that don't start with an operator, to leave
6037 those cases to other line-up functions. Example:
6038
6039 @example
6040 @group
6041 if ( x < 10
6042 || at_limit (x, @hereFn{c-lineup-arglist-operators}
6043 list) @hereFn{c-lineup-arglist-operators@r{ returns nil}}
6044 )
6045 @end group
6046 @end example
6047
6048 Since this function doesn't do anything for lines without an infix
6049 operator you typically want to use it together with some other lineup
6050 settings, e.g., as follows (the @code{arglist-close} setting is just a
6051 suggestion to get a consistent style):
6052
6053 @example
6054 (c-set-offset 'arglist-cont
6055 '(c-lineup-arglist-operators 0))
6056 (c-set-offset 'arglist-cont-nonempty
6057 '(c-lineup-arglist-operators c-lineup-arglist))
6058 (c-set-offset 'arglist-close
6059 '(c-lineup-arglist-close-under-paren))
6060 @end example
6061
6062 @workswith @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6063 @end defun
6064
6065 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6066
6067 @defun c-lineup-assignments
6068 @findex lineup-assignments (c-)
6069 Line up the current line after the assignment operator on the first line
6070 in the statement. If there isn't any, return @code{nil} to allow stacking with
6071 other line-up functions. If the current line contains an assignment
6072 operator too, try to align it with the first one.
6073
6074 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}, @code{statement-cont},
6075 @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6076
6077 @end defun
6078
6079 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6080
6081 @defun c-lineup-math
6082 @findex lineup-math (c-)
6083 Like @code{c-lineup-assignments} but indent with @code{c-basic-offset}
6084 if no assignment operator was found on the first line. I.e., this
6085 function is the same as specifying a list @code{(c-lineup-assignments
6086 +)}. It's provided for compatibility with old configurations.
6087
6088 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}, @code{statement-cont},
6089 @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6090 @end defun
6091
6092 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6093
6094 @defun c-lineup-cascaded-calls
6095 @findex lineup-cascaded-calls (c-)
6096 Line up ``cascaded calls'' under each other. If the line begins with
6097 @code{->} or @code{.} and the preceding line ends with one or more
6098 function calls preceded by the same token, then the arrow is lined up
6099 with the first of those tokens. E.g.:
6100
6101 @example
6102 @group
6103 r = proc->add(17)->add(18)
6104 ->add(19) + @hereFn{c-lineup-cascaded-calls}
6105 offset; @hereFn{c-lineup-cascaded-calls@r{ (inactive)}}
6106 @end group
6107 @end example
6108
6109 In any other situation @code{nil} is returned to allow use in list
6110 expressions.
6111
6112 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}, @code{statement-cont},
6113 @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6114 @end defun
6115
6116 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6117
6118 @defun c-lineup-streamop
6119 @findex lineup-streamop (c-)
6120 Line up C++ stream operators (i.e., @samp{<<} and @samp{>>}).
6121
6122 @workswith @code{stream-op}.
6123 @end defun
6124
6125 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6126
6127 @defun c-lineup-string-cont
6128 @findex lineup-string-cont (c-)
6129 Line up a continued string under the one it continues. A continued
6130 string in this sense is where a string literal follows directly after
6131 another one. E.g.:
6132
6133 @example
6134 @group
6135 result = prefix + "A message "
6136 "string."; @hereFn{c-lineup-string-cont}
6137 @end group
6138 @end example
6139
6140 @code{nil} is returned in other situations, to allow stacking with other
6141 lineup functions.
6142
6143 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}, @code{statement-cont},
6144 @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6145 @end defun
6146
6147
6148 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6149 @node Comment Line-Up, Misc Line-Up, Operator Line-Up, Line-Up Functions
6150 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6151 @subsection Comment Line-Up Functions
6152 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6153
6154 The lineup functions here calculate the indentation for several types
6155 of comment structure.
6156
6157 @defun c-lineup-C-comments
6158 @findex lineup-C-comments (c-)
6159 Line up C block comment continuation lines. Various heuristics are used
6160 to handle most of the common comment styles. Some examples:
6161
6162 @example
6163 @group
6164 /* /** /*
6165 * text * text text
6166 */ */ */
6167 @end group
6168 @end example
6169
6170 @example
6171 @group
6172 /* text /* /**
6173 text ** text ** text
6174 */ */ */
6175 @end group
6176 @end example
6177
6178 @example
6179 @group
6180 /**************************************************
6181 * text
6182 *************************************************/
6183 @end group
6184 @end example
6185
6186 @vindex comment-start-skip
6187 @example
6188 @group
6189 /**************************************************
6190 Free form text comments:
6191 In comments with a long delimiter line at the
6192 start, the indentation is kept unchanged for lines
6193 that start with an empty comment line prefix. The
6194 delimiter line is whatever matches the
6195 @code{comment-start-skip} regexp.
6196 **************************************************/
6197 @end group
6198 @end example
6199
6200 The style variable @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} is used to recognize
6201 the comment line prefix, e.g., the @samp{*} that usually starts every
6202 line inside a comment.
6203
6204 @workswith The @code{c} syntactic symbol.
6205 @end defun
6206
6207 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6208
6209 @defun c-lineup-comment
6210 @findex lineup-comment (c-)
6211 Line up a comment-only line according to the style variable
6212 @code{c-comment-only-line-offset}. If the comment is lined up with a
6213 comment starter on the previous line, that alignment is preserved.
6214
6215 @defopt c-comment-only-line-offset
6216 @vindex comment-only-line-offset (c-)
6217 This style variable specifies the extra offset for the line. It can
6218 contain an integer or a cons cell of the form
6219
6220 @example
6221 (@r{@var{non-anchored-offset}} . @r{@var{anchored-offset}})
6222 @end example
6223
6224 @noindent
6225 where @var{non-anchored-offset} is the amount of offset given to
6226 non-column-zero anchored lines, and @var{anchored-offset} is the amount
6227 of offset to give column-zero anchored lines. Just an integer as value
6228 is equivalent to @code{(@r{@var{value}} . -1000)}.
6229 @end defopt
6230
6231 @workswith @code{comment-intro}.
6232 @end defun
6233
6234 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6235
6236 @defun c-lineup-knr-region-comment
6237 @findex lineup-knr-region-comment (c-)
6238 Line up a comment in the ``K&R region'' with the declaration. That is
6239 the region between the function or class header and the beginning of the
6240 block. E.g.:
6241
6242 @example
6243 @group
6244 int main()
6245 /* Called at startup. */ @hereFn{c-lineup-knr-region-comment}
6246 @{
6247 return 0;
6248 @}
6249 @end group
6250 @end example
6251
6252 Return @code{nil} if called in any other situation, to be useful in list
6253 expressions.
6254
6255 @workswith @code{comment-intro}.
6256 @end defun
6257
6258 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6259 @node Misc Line-Up, , Comment Line-Up, Line-Up Functions
6260 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6261 @subsection Miscellaneous Line-Up Functions
6262 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6263
6264 The line-up functions here are the odds and ends which didn't fit into
6265 any earlier category.
6266
6267 @defun c-lineup-dont-change
6268 @findex lineup-dont-change (c-)
6269 This lineup function makes the line stay at whatever indentation it
6270 already has; think of it as an identity function for lineups.
6271
6272 @workswith Any syntactic symbol.
6273 @end defun
6274
6275 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6276
6277 @defun c-lineup-cpp-define
6278 @findex lineup-cpp-define (c-)
6279 Line up macro continuation lines according to the indentation of the
6280 construct preceding the macro. E.g.:
6281
6282 @example
6283 @group
6284 const char msg[] = @hereFn{@r{The beginning of the preceding construct.}}
6285 \"Some text.\";
6286
6287 #define X(A, B) \
6288 do @{ \ @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
6289 printf (A, B); \
6290 @} while (0)
6291 @end group
6292 @end example
6293
6294 @noindent
6295 and:
6296
6297 @example
6298 @group
6299 int dribble() @{
6300 if (!running) @hereFn{@r{The beginning of the preceding construct.}}
6301 error(\"Not running!\");
6302
6303 #define X(A, B) \
6304 do @{ \ @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
6305 printf (A, B); \
6306 @} while (0)
6307 @end group
6308 @end example
6309
6310 If @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} is non-@code{nil}, the
6311 function returns the relative indentation to the macro start line to
6312 allow accumulation with other offsets. E.g., in the following cases,
6313 @code{cpp-define-intro} is combined with the
6314 @code{statement-block-intro} that comes from the @samp{do @{} that hangs
6315 on the @samp{#define} line:
6316
6317 @example
6318 @group
6319 const char msg[] =
6320 \"Some text.\";
6321
6322 #define X(A, B) do @{ \
6323 printf (A, B); \ @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
6324 this->refs++; \
6325 @} while (0) @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
6326 @end group
6327 @end example
6328
6329 @noindent
6330 and:
6331
6332 @example
6333 @group
6334 int dribble() @{
6335 if (!running)
6336 error(\"Not running!\");
6337
6338 #define X(A, B) do @{ \
6339 printf (A, B); \ @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
6340 this->refs++; \
6341 @} while (0) @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
6342 @end group
6343 @end example
6344
6345 The relative indentation returned by @code{c-lineup-cpp-define} is zero
6346 and two, respectively, on the two lines in each of these examples. They
6347 are then added to the two column indentation that
6348 @code{statement-block-intro} gives in both cases here.
6349
6350 If the relative indentation is zero, then @code{nil} is returned
6351 instead. That is useful in a list expression to specify the default
6352 indentation on the top level.
6353
6354 If @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} is @code{nil} then this
6355 function keeps the current indentation, except for empty lines (ignoring
6356 the ending backslash) where it takes the indentation from the closest
6357 preceding nonempty line in the macro. If there's no such line in the
6358 macro then the indentation is taken from the construct preceding it, as
6359 described above.
6360
6361 @workswith @code{cpp-define-intro}.
6362 @end defun
6363
6364 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6365
6366 @defun c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg
6367 @findex lineup-gcc-asm-reg (c-)
6368 Line up a gcc asm register under one on a previous line.
6369
6370 @example
6371 @group
6372 asm ("foo %1, %0\n"
6373 "bar %0, %1"
6374 : "=r" (w),
6375 "=r" (x)
6376 : "0" (y),
6377 "1" (z));
6378 @end group
6379 @end example
6380
6381 The @samp{x} line is aligned to the text after the @samp{:} on the
6382 @samp{w} line, and similarly @samp{z} under @samp{y}.
6383
6384 This is done only in an @samp{asm} or @samp{__asm__} block, and only to
6385 those lines mentioned. Anywhere else @code{nil} is returned. The usual
6386 arrangement is to have this routine as an extra feature at the start of
6387 arglist lineups, e.g.:
6388
6389 @example
6390 (c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg c-lineup-arglist)
6391 @end example
6392
6393 @workswith @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6394 @end defun
6395
6396 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6397
6398 @defun c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont
6399 @findex lineup-topmost-intro-cont (c-)
6400 Line up declaration continuation lines zero or one indentation
6401 step@footnote{This function is mainly provided to mimic the behavior of
6402 CC Mode 5.28 and earlier where this case wasn't handled consistently so
6403 that those lines could be analyzed as either topmost-intro-cont or
6404 statement-cont. It's used for @code{topmost-intro-cont} by default, but
6405 you might consider using @code{+} instead.}. For lines preceding a
6406 definition, zero is used. For other lines, @code{c-basic-offset} is
6407 added to the indentation. E.g.:
6408
6409 @example
6410 @group
6411 int
6412 neg (int i) @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
6413 @{
6414 return -i;
6415 @}
6416 @end group
6417 @end example
6418
6419 @noindent
6420 and
6421
6422 @example
6423 @group
6424 struct
6425 larch @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
6426 @{
6427 double height;
6428 @}
6429 the_larch, @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
6430 another_larch; @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
6431 @sssTBasicOffset{}
6432 @end group
6433 @end example
6434
6435 @noindent
6436 and
6437
6438 @example
6439 @group
6440 struct larch
6441 the_larch, @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
6442 another_larch; @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
6443 @end group
6444 @end example
6445
6446 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}.
6447 @end defun
6448
6449 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6450 @node Custom Line-Up, Other Indentation, Line-Up Functions, Customizing Indentation
6451 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6452 @section Custom Line-Up Functions
6453 @cindex customization, indentation functions
6454 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6455
6456 The most flexible way to customize indentation is by writing custom
6457 line-up functions, and associating them with specific syntactic
6458 symbols (@pxref{c-offsets-alist}). Depending on the effect you want,
6459 it might be better to write a @code{c-special-indent-hook} function
6460 rather than a line-up function (@pxref{Other Indentation}).
6461
6462 @ccmode{} comes with an extensive set of predefined line-up functions,
6463 not all of which are used by the default styles. So there's a good
6464 chance the function you want already exists. @xref{Line-Up
6465 Functions}, for a list of them. If you write your own line-up
6466 function, it's probably a good idea to start working from one of these
6467 predefined functions, which can be found in the file
6468 @file{cc-align.el}. If you have written a line-up function that you
6469 think is generally useful, you're very welcome to contribute it;
6470 please contact @email{bug-cc-mode@@gnu.org}.
6471
6472 Line-up functions are passed a single argument, the syntactic
6473 element (see below). At the time of the call, point will be somewhere
6474 on the line being indented. The return value is a
6475 @code{c-offsets-alist} offset specification: for example, an integer,
6476 a symbol such as @code{+}, a vector, @code{nil}@footnote{Returning
6477 @code{nil} is useful when the offset specification for a syntactic
6478 element is a list containing the line-up function
6479 (@pxref{c-offsets-alist}).}, or even another line-up function. Full
6480 details of these are in @ref{c-offsets-alist}.
6481
6482 Line-up functions must not move point or change the content of the
6483 buffer (except temporarily). They are however allowed to do
6484 @dfn{hidden buffer changes}, i.e., setting text properties for caching
6485 purposes etc. Buffer undo recording is disabled while they run.
6486
6487 The syntactic element passed as the parameter to a line-up function is
6488 a cons cell of the form
6489
6490 @example
6491 (@r{@var{syntactic-symbol}} . @r{@var{anchor-position}})
6492 @end example
6493
6494 @noindent
6495 @c FIXME!!! The following sentence might be better omitted, since the
6496 @c information is in the cross reference "Syntactic Analysis". 2005/10/2.
6497 where @var{syntactic-symbol} is the symbol that the function was
6498 called for, and @var{anchor-position} is the anchor position (if any)
6499 for the construct that triggered the syntactic symbol
6500 (@pxref{Syntactic Analysis}). This cons cell is how the syntactic
6501 element of a line used to be represented in @ccmode{} 5.28 and
6502 earlier. Line-up functions are still passed this cons cell, so as to
6503 preserve compatibility with older configurations. In the future, we
6504 may decide to convert to using the full list format---you can prepare
6505 your setup for this by using the access functions
6506 (@code{c-langelem-sym}, etc.)@: described below.
6507
6508 @vindex c-syntactic-element
6509 @vindex syntactic-element (c-)
6510 @vindex c-syntactic-context
6511 @vindex syntactic-context (c-)
6512 Some syntactic symbols, e.g., @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}, have more
6513 info in the syntactic element: typically other positions that can be
6514 interesting besides the anchor position. That info can't be accessed
6515 through the passed argument, which is a cons cell. Instead, you can
6516 get this information from the variable @code{c-syntactic-element},
6517 which is dynamically bound to the complete syntactic element. The
6518 variable @code{c-syntactic-context} might also be useful: it gets
6519 dynamically bound to the complete syntactic context. @xref{Custom
6520 Braces}.
6521
6522 @ccmode{} provides a few functions to access parts of syntactic
6523 elements in a more abstract way. Besides making the code easier to
6524 read, they also hide the difference between the old cons cell form
6525 used in the line-up function argument and the new list form used in
6526 @code{c-syntactic-element} and everywhere else. The functions are:
6527
6528 @defun c-langelem-sym langelem
6529 @findex langelem-sym (c-)
6530 Return the syntactic symbol in @var{langelem}.
6531 @end defun
6532
6533 @defun c-langelem-pos langelem
6534 @findex langelem-pos (c-)
6535 Return the anchor position in @var{langelem}, or @code{nil} if there is none.
6536 @end defun
6537
6538 @defun c-langelem-col langelem &optional preserve-point
6539 @findex langelem-col (c-)
6540 Return the column of the anchor position in @var{langelem}. Also move
6541 the point to that position unless @var{preserve-point} is
6542 non-@code{nil}.
6543 @end defun
6544
6545 @defun c-langelem-2nd-pos langelem
6546 @findex langelem-2nd-pos (c-)
6547 Return the secondary position in @var{langelem}, or @code{nil} if there
6548 is none.
6549
6550 Note that the return value of this function is always @code{nil} if
6551 @var{langelem} is in the old cons cell form. Thus this function is
6552 only meaningful when used on syntactic elements taken from
6553 @code{c-syntactic-element} or @code{c-syntactic-context}.
6554 @end defun
6555
6556 Custom line-up functions can be as simple or as complex as you like, and
6557 any syntactic symbol that appears in @code{c-offsets-alist} can have a
6558 custom line-up function associated with it.
6559
6560 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6561 @node Other Indentation, , Custom Line-Up, Customizing Indentation
6562 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6563 @section Other Special Indentations
6564 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6565
6566 To configure macros which you invoke without a terminating @samp{;},
6567 see @xref{Macros with ;}.
6568
6569 Here are the remaining odds and ends regarding indentation:
6570
6571 @defopt c-label-minimum-indentation
6572 @vindex label-minimum-indentation (c-)
6573 In @samp{gnu} style (@pxref{Built-in Styles}), a minimum indentation is
6574 imposed on lines inside code blocks. This minimum indentation is
6575 controlled by this style variable. The default value is 1.
6576
6577 @findex c-gnu-impose-minimum
6578 @findex gnu-impose-minimum (c-)
6579 It's the function @code{c-gnu-impose-minimum} that enforces this minimum
6580 indentation. It must be present on @code{c-special-indent-hook} to
6581 work.
6582 @end defopt
6583
6584 @defopt c-special-indent-hook
6585 @vindex special-indent-hook (c-)
6586 This style variable is a standard hook variable that is called after
6587 every line is indented by @ccmode{}. It is called only if
6588 @code{c-syntactic-indentation} is non-@code{nil} (which it is by
6589 default (@pxref{Indentation Engine Basics})). You can put a function
6590 on this hook to do any special indentation or ad hoc line adjustments
6591 your style dictates, such as adding extra indentation to constructors
6592 or destructor declarations in a class definition, etc. Sometimes it
6593 is better to write a custom Line-up Function instead (@pxref{Custom
6594 Line-Up}).
6595
6596 When the indentation engine calls this hook, the variable
6597 @code{c-syntactic-context} is bound to the current syntactic context
6598 (i.e., what you would get by typing @kbd{C-c C-s} on the source line.
6599 @xref{Custom Braces}.). Note that you should not change point or mark
6600 inside a @code{c-special-indent-hook} function, i.e., you'll probably
6601 want to wrap your function in a @code{save-excursion}@footnote{The
6602 numerical value returned by @code{point} will change if you change the
6603 indentation of the line within a @code{save-excursion} form, but point
6604 itself will still be over the same piece of text.}.
6605
6606 Setting @code{c-special-indent-hook} in style definitions is handled
6607 slightly differently from other variables---A style can only add
6608 functions to this hook, not remove them. @xref{Style Variables}.
6609 @end defopt
6610
6611
6612 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6613 @node Custom Macros, Odds and Ends, Customizing Indentation, Top
6614 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6615 @chapter Customizing Macros
6616 @cindex macros
6617 @cindex preprocessor directives
6618 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6619
6620 Preprocessor macros in C, C++, and Objective C (introduced by
6621 @code{#define}) have a syntax different from the main language---for
6622 example, a macro declaration is not terminated by a semicolon, and if
6623 it is more than a line long, line breaks in it must be escaped with
6624 backslashes. @ccmode{} has some commands to manipulate these, see
6625 @ref{Macro Backslashes}.
6626
6627 Normally, the lines in a multi-line macro are indented relative to
6628 each other as though they were code. You can suppress this behavior
6629 by setting the following user option:
6630
6631 @defopt c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros
6632 @vindex syntactic-indentation-in-macros (c-)
6633 Enable syntactic analysis inside macros, which is the default. If this
6634 is @code{nil}, all lines inside macro definitions are analyzed as
6635 @code{cpp-macro-cont}.
6636 @end defopt
6637
6638 Because a macro can expand into anything at all, near where one is
6639 invoked @ccmode{} can only indent and fontify code heuristically.
6640 Sometimes it gets it wrong. Usually you should try to design your
6641 macros so that they ''look like ordinary code'' when you invoke them.
6642 However, one situation is so common that @ccmode{} handles it
6643 specially: that is when certain macros needn't (or mustn't) be
6644 followed by a @samp{;}. You need to configure @ccmode{} to handle
6645 these macros properly, see @ref{Macros with ;}.
6646
6647 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6648 @menu
6649 * Macro Backslashes::
6650 * Macros with ;::
6651 @end menu
6652
6653 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6654 @node Macro Backslashes, Macros with ;, Custom Macros, Custom Macros
6655 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6656 @section Customizing Macro Backslashes
6657 @cindex @code{#define}
6658 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6659
6660 @ccmode{} provides some tools to help keep the line continuation
6661 backslashes in macros neat and tidy. Their precise action is
6662 customized with these variables:
6663
6664 @defopt c-backslash-column
6665 @vindex backslash-column (c-)
6666 @defoptx c-backslash-max-column
6667 @vindex backslash-max-column (c-)
6668 These variables control the alignment columns for line continuation
6669 backslashes in multiline macros. They are used by the functions that
6670 automatically insert or align such backslashes,
6671 e.g., @code{c-backslash-region} and @code{c-context-line-break}.
6672
6673 @code{c-backslash-column} specifies the minimum column for the
6674 backslashes. If any line in the macro goes past this column, then the
6675 next tab stop (i.e., next multiple of @code{tab-width}) in that line is
6676 used as the alignment column for all the backslashes, so that they
6677 remain in a single column. However, if any lines go past
6678 @code{c-backslash-max-column} then the backslashes in the rest of the
6679 macro will be kept at that column, so that the lines which are too
6680 long ``stick out'' instead.
6681
6682 Don't ever set these variables to @code{nil}. If you want to disable
6683 the automatic alignment of backslashes, use
6684 @code{c-auto-align-backslashes}.
6685 @end defopt
6686
6687 @defopt c-auto-align-backslashes
6688 @vindex auto-align-backslashes (c-)
6689 Align automatically inserted line continuation backslashes if
6690 non-@code{nil}. When line continuation backslashes are inserted
6691 automatically for line breaks in multiline macros, e.g., by
6692 @code{c-context-line-break}, they are aligned with the other
6693 backslashes in the same macro if this flag is set.
6694
6695 If @code{c-auto-align-backslashes} is @code{nil}, automatically
6696 inserted backslashes are preceded by a single space, and backslashes
6697 get aligned only when you explicitly invoke the command
6698 @code{c-backslash-region} (@kbd{C-c C-\}).
6699 @end defopt
6700
6701 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6702 @node Macros with ;, , Macro Backslashes, Custom Macros
6703 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6704 @section Macros with semicolons
6705 @cindex macros with semicolons
6706 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6707 Macros which needn't (or mustn't) be followed by a semicolon when you
6708 invoke them, @dfn{macros with semicolons}, are very common. These can
6709 cause @ccmode{} to parse the next line wrongly as a
6710 @code{statement-cont} (@pxref{Function Symbols}) and thus mis-indent
6711 it.
6712
6713 You can prevent this by specifying which macros have semicolons. It
6714 doesn't matter whether or not such a macro has a parameter list:
6715
6716 @defopt c-macro-names-with-semicolon
6717 @vindex macro-names-with-semicolon (c-)
6718 This buffer-local variable specifies which macros have semicolons.
6719 After setting its value, you need to call
6720 @code{c-make-macro-with-semi-re} for it to take effect. It should be
6721 set to one of these values:
6722
6723 @table @asis
6724 @item nil
6725 There are no macros with semicolons.
6726 @item a list of strings
6727 Each string is the name of a macro with a semicolon. Only valid
6728 @code{#define} names are allowed here. For example, to set the
6729 default value, you could write the following into your @file{.emacs}:
6730
6731 @example
6732 (setq c-macro-names-with-semicolon
6733 '("Q_OBJECT" "Q_PROPERTY" "Q_DECLARE" "Q_ENUMS"))
6734 @end example
6735
6736 @item a regular expression
6737 This matches each symbol which is a macro with a semicolon. It must
6738 not match any string which isn't a valid @code{#define} name. For
6739 example:
6740
6741 @example
6742 (setq c-macro-names-with-semicolon
6743 "\\<\\(CLEAN_UP_AND_RETURN\\|Q_[[:upper:]]+\\)\\>")
6744 @end example
6745 @end table
6746 @end defopt
6747
6748 @defun c-make-macro-with-semi-re
6749 @findex make-macro-with-semi-re (c-)
6750 Call this (non-interactive) function, which sets internal variables,
6751 each time you change the value of
6752 @code{c-macro-names-with-semicolon}. It takes no arguments, and its
6753 return value has no meaning. This function is called by @ccmode{}'s
6754 initialization code.
6755 @end defun
6756
6757 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6758 @node Odds and Ends, Sample Init File, Custom Macros, Top
6759 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6760 @chapter Odds and Ends
6761 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6762
6763 The stuff that didn't fit in anywhere else is documented here.
6764
6765 @defopt c-require-final-newline
6766 @vindex require-final-newline (c-)
6767 Controls whether a final newline is enforced when the file is saved.
6768 The value is an association list that for each language mode specifies
6769 the value to give to @code{require-final-newline} (@pxref{Saving
6770 Buffers,,,@lispref{}, @lispreftitle{}}) at mode initialization. If a
6771 language isn't present on the association list, CC Mode won't touch
6772 @code{require-final-newline} in buffers for that language.
6773
6774 The default is to set @code{require-final-newline} to @code{t} in the
6775 languages that mandate that source files should end with newlines.
6776 These are C, C++ and Objective-C.
6777 @end defopt
6778
6779 @defopt c-echo-syntactic-information-p
6780 @vindex echo-syntactic-information-p (c-)
6781 If non-@code{nil}, the syntactic analysis for the current line is shown
6782 in the echo area when it's indented (unless
6783 @code{c-syntactic-indentation} is @code{nil}). That's useful when
6784 finding out which syntactic symbols to modify to get the indentation you
6785 want.
6786 @end defopt
6787
6788 @defopt c-report-syntactic-errors
6789 @vindex report-syntactic-errors (c-)
6790 If non-@code{nil}, certain syntactic errors are reported with a ding and
6791 a message, for example when an @code{else} is indented for which there
6792 is no corresponding @code{if}.
6793
6794 Note however that @ccmode{} doesn't make any special effort to check for
6795 syntactic errors; that's the job of the compiler. The reason it can
6796 report cases like the one above is that it can't find the correct
6797 anchoring position to indent the line in that case.
6798 @end defopt
6799
6800
6801 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6802 @node Sample Init File, Performance Issues, Odds and Ends, Top
6803 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6804 @appendix Sample Init File
6805 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6806
6807 Here's a sample .emacs file fragment that might help you along the way.
6808 Just copy this region and paste it into your .emacs file. You might want
6809 to change some of the actual values.
6810
6811 @verbatim
6812 ;; Make a non-standard key binding. We can put this in
6813 ;; c-mode-base-map because c-mode-map, c++-mode-map, and so on,
6814 ;; inherit from it.
6815 (defun my-c-initialization-hook ()
6816 (define-key c-mode-base-map "\C-m" 'c-context-line-break))
6817 (add-hook 'c-initialization-hook 'my-c-initialization-hook)
6818
6819 ;; offset customizations not in my-c-style
6820 ;; This will take precedence over any setting of the syntactic symbol
6821 ;; made by a style.
6822 (setq c-offsets-alist '((member-init-intro . ++)))
6823
6824 ;; Create my personal style.
6825 (defconst my-c-style
6826 '((c-tab-always-indent . t)
6827 (c-comment-only-line-offset . 4)
6828 (c-hanging-braces-alist . ((substatement-open after)
6829 (brace-list-open)))
6830 (c-hanging-colons-alist . ((member-init-intro before)
6831 (inher-intro)
6832 (case-label after)
6833 (label after)
6834 (access-label after)))
6835 (c-cleanup-list . (scope-operator
6836 empty-defun-braces
6837 defun-close-semi))
6838 (c-offsets-alist . ((arglist-close . c-lineup-arglist)
6839 (substatement-open . 0)
6840 (case-label . 4)
6841 (block-open . 0)
6842 (knr-argdecl-intro . -)))
6843 (c-echo-syntactic-information-p . t))
6844 "My C Programming Style")
6845 (c-add-style "PERSONAL" my-c-style)
6846
6847 ;; Customizations for all modes in CC Mode.
6848 (defun my-c-mode-common-hook ()
6849 ;; set my personal style for the current buffer
6850 (c-set-style "PERSONAL")
6851 ;; other customizations
6852 (setq tab-width 8
6853 ;; this will make sure spaces are used instead of tabs
6854 indent-tabs-mode nil)
6855 ;; we like auto-newline, but not hungry-delete
6856 (c-toggle-auto-newline 1))
6857 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook 'my-c-mode-common-hook)
6858 @end verbatim
6859
6860 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6861 @node Performance Issues, Limitations and Known Bugs, Sample Init File, Top
6862 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6863 @appendix Performance Issues
6864 @cindex performance
6865 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6866
6867 @comment FIXME: (ACM, 2003/5/24). Check whether AWK needs mentioning here.
6868
6869 C and its derivative languages are highly complex creatures. Often,
6870 ambiguous code situations arise that require @ccmode{} to scan large
6871 portions of the buffer to determine syntactic context. Such
6872 pathological code can cause @ccmode{} to perform fairly badly. This
6873 section gives some insight in how @ccmode{} operates, how that interacts
6874 with some coding styles, and what you can use to improve performance.
6875
6876 The overall goal is that @ccmode{} shouldn't be overly slow (i.e., take
6877 more than a fraction of a second) in any interactive operation.
6878 I.e., it's tuned to limit the maximum response time in single operations,
6879 which is sometimes at the expense of batch-like operations like
6880 reindenting whole blocks. If you find that @ccmode{} gradually gets
6881 slower and slower in certain situations, perhaps as the file grows in
6882 size or as the macro or comment you're editing gets bigger, then chances
6883 are that something isn't working right. You should consider reporting
6884 it, unless it's something that's mentioned in this section.
6885
6886 Because @ccmode{} has to scan the buffer backwards from the current
6887 insertion point, and because C's syntax is fairly difficult to parse in
6888 the backwards direction, @ccmode{} often tries to find the nearest
6889 position higher up in the buffer from which to begin a forward scan
6890 (it's typically an opening or closing parenthesis of some kind). The
6891 farther this position is from the current insertion point, the slower it
6892 gets.
6893
6894 @findex beginning-of-defun
6895 In earlier versions of @ccmode{}, we used to recommend putting the
6896 opening brace of a top-level construct@footnote{E.g., a function in C,
6897 or outermost class definition in C++ or Java.} into the leftmost
6898 column. Earlier still, this used to be a rigid Emacs constraint, as
6899 embodied in the @code{beginning-of-defun} function. @ccmode now
6900 caches syntactic information much better, so that the delay caused by
6901 searching for such a brace when it's not in column 0 is minimal,
6902 except perhaps when you've just moved a long way inside the file.
6903
6904 @findex defun-prompt-regexp
6905 @vindex c-Java-defun-prompt-regexp
6906 @vindex Java-defun-prompt-regexp (c-)
6907 A special note about @code{defun-prompt-regexp} in Java mode: The common
6908 style is to hang the opening braces of functions and classes on the
6909 right side of the line, and that doesn't work well with the Emacs
6910 approach. @ccmode{} comes with a constant
6911 @code{c-Java-defun-prompt-regexp} which tries to define a regular
6912 expression usable for this style, but there are problems with it. In
6913 some cases it can cause @code{beginning-of-defun} to hang@footnote{This
6914 has been observed in Emacs 19.34 and XEmacs 19.15.}. For this reason,
6915 it is not used by default, but if you feel adventurous, you can set
6916 @code{defun-prompt-regexp} to it in your mode hook. In any event,
6917 setting and relying on @code{defun-prompt-regexp} will definitely slow
6918 things down because (X)Emacs will be doing regular expression searches a
6919 lot, so you'll probably be taking a hit either way!
6920
6921 @ccmode{} maintains a cache of the opening parentheses of the blocks
6922 surrounding the point, and it adapts that cache as the point is moved
6923 around. That means that in bad cases it can take noticeable time to
6924 indent a line in a new surrounding, but after that it gets fast as long
6925 as the point isn't moved far off. The farther the point is moved, the
6926 less useful is the cache. Since editing typically is done in ``chunks''
6927 rather than on single lines far apart from each other, the cache
6928 typically gives good performance even when the code doesn't fit the
6929 Emacs approach to finding the defun starts.
6930
6931 @vindex c-enable-xemacs-performance-kludge-p
6932 @vindex enable-xemacs-performance-kludge-p (c-)
6933 XEmacs users can set the variable
6934 @code{c-enable-xemacs-performance-kludge-p} to non-@code{nil}. This
6935 tells @ccmode{} to use XEmacs-specific built-in functions which, in some
6936 circumstances, can locate the top-most opening brace much more quickly than
6937 @code{beginning-of-defun}. Preliminary testing has shown that for
6938 styles where these braces are hung (e.g., most JDK-derived Java styles),
6939 this hack can improve performance of the core syntax parsing routines
6940 from 3 to 60 times. However, for styles which @emph{do} conform to
6941 Emacs's recommended style of putting top-level braces in column zero,
6942 this hack can degrade performance by about as much. Thus this variable
6943 is set to @code{nil} by default, since the Emacs-friendly styles should
6944 be more common (and encouraged!). Note that this variable has no effect
6945 in Emacs since the necessary built-in functions don't exist (in Emacs
6946 22.1 as of this writing in February 2007).
6947
6948 Text properties are used to speed up skipping over syntactic whitespace,
6949 i.e., comments and preprocessor directives. Indenting a line after a
6950 huge macro definition can be slow the first time, but after that the
6951 text properties are in place and it should be fast (even after you've
6952 edited other parts of the file and then moved back).
6953
6954 Font locking can be a CPU hog, especially the font locking done on
6955 decoration level 3 which tries to be very accurate. Note that that
6956 level is designed to be used with a font lock support mode that only
6957 fontifies the text that's actually shown, i.e., Lazy Lock or Just-in-time
6958 Lock mode, so make sure you use one of them. Fontification of a whole
6959 buffer with some thousand lines can often take over a minute. That is
6960 a known weakness; the idea is that it never should happen.
6961
6962 The most effective way to speed up font locking is to reduce the
6963 decoration level to 2 by setting @code{font-lock-maximum-decoration}
6964 appropriately. That level is designed to be as pretty as possible
6965 without sacrificing performance. @xref{Font Locking Preliminaries}, for
6966 more info.
6967
6968
6969 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6970 @node Limitations and Known Bugs, FAQ, Performance Issues, Top
6971 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6972 @appendix Limitations and Known Bugs
6973 @cindex limitations
6974 @cindex bugs
6975 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6976
6977 @itemize @bullet
6978 @item
6979 @ccmode{} doesn't support trigraphs. (These are character sequences
6980 such as @samp{??(}, which represents @samp{[}. They date from a time
6981 when some character sets didn't have all the characters that C needs,
6982 and are now utterly obsolete.)
6983
6984 @item
6985 There is no way to apply auto newline settings (@pxref{Auto-newlines})
6986 on already typed lines. That's only a feature to ease interactive
6987 editing.
6988
6989 To generalize this issue a bit: @ccmode{} is not intended to be used as
6990 a reformatter for old code in some more or less batch-like way. With
6991 the exception of some functions like @code{c-indent-region}, it's only
6992 geared to be used interactively to edit new code. There's currently no
6993 intention to change this goal.
6994
6995 If you want to reformat old code, you're probably better off using some
6996 other tool instead, e.g., @ref{Top, , GNU indent, indent, The `indent'
6997 Manual}, which has more powerful reformatting capabilities than
6998 @ccmode{}.
6999
7000 @item
7001 The support for C++ templates (in angle brackets) is not yet complete.
7002 When a non-nested template is used in a declaration, @ccmode{} indents
7003 it and font-locks it OK@. Templates used in expressions, and nested
7004 templates do not fare so well. Sometimes a workaround is to refontify
7005 the expression after typing the closing @samp{>}.
7006
7007 @item
7008 In a @dfn{k&r region} (the part of an old-fashioned C function
7009 declaration which specifies the types of its parameters, coming
7010 between the parameter list and the opening brace), there should be at
7011 most 20 top-level parenthesis and bracket pairs. This limit has been
7012 imposed for performance reasons. If it is violated, the source file
7013 might be incorrectly indented or fontified.
7014
7015 @item
7016 On loading @ccmode{}, sometimes this error message appears:
7017
7018 @example
7019 File mode specification error: (void-variable c-font-lock-keywords-3)
7020 @end example
7021
7022 This is due to a bug in the function @code{eval-after-load} in some
7023 versions of (X)Emacs. It can manifest itself when there is a symbolic
7024 link in the path of the directory which contains (X)Emacs. As a
7025 workaround, put the following into your @file{.emacs} file, fairly
7026 early on:
7027
7028 @example
7029 (defun my-load-cc-fonts ()
7030 (require "cc-fonts"))
7031 (add-hook 'c-initialization-hook 'my-load-cc-fonts)
7032 @end example
7033 @end itemize
7034
7035 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7036 @node FAQ, Updating CC Mode, Limitations and Known Bugs, Top
7037 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7038 @appendix Frequently Asked Questions
7039 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7040
7041 @itemize @bullet
7042 @item
7043 @emph{How can I change the indent level from 4 spaces to 2 spaces?}
7044
7045 Set the variable @code{c-basic-offset}. @xref{Getting Started}.
7046
7047 @item
7048 @kindex RET
7049 @kindex C-j
7050 @emph{Why does/doesn't the @kbd{RET} key indent the new line?}
7051
7052 Emacs's convention used to be that @kbd{RET} just adds a newline, and that
7053 @kbd{C-j} adds a newline and indents it. In Emacs-24.4, this convention was
7054 reversed.
7055
7056 If you use an older Emacs and you want @kbd{RET} do this
7057 too, add this to your @code{c-initialization-hook}:
7058
7059 @example
7060 (define-key c-mode-base-map "\C-m" 'c-context-line-break)
7061 @end example
7062
7063 @xref{Getting Started}. This was a very common question.
7064
7065 @item
7066 @emph{How do I stop my code jumping all over the place when I type?}
7067
7068 Deactivate ``electric minor mode'' with @kbd{C-c C-l}. @xref{Getting
7069 Started}.
7070
7071 @item
7072 @kindex C-x h
7073 @kindex C-M-\
7074 @emph{How do I reindent the whole file?}
7075
7076 Visit the file and hit @kbd{C-x h} to mark the whole buffer. Then hit
7077 @kbd{C-M-\}. @xref{Indentation Commands}.
7078
7079 @item
7080 @kindex C-M-q
7081 @kindex C-M-u
7082 @emph{How do I reindent the current block?}
7083
7084 First move to the brace which opens the block with @kbd{C-M-u}, then
7085 reindent that expression with @kbd{C-M-q}. @xref{Indentation
7086 Commands}.
7087
7088 @item
7089 @emph{I put @code{(c-set-offset 'substatement-open 0)} in my
7090 @file{.emacs} file but I get an error saying that @code{c-set-offset}'s
7091 function definition is void. What's wrong?}
7092
7093 This means that @ccmode{} hasn't yet been loaded into your Emacs
7094 session by the time the @code{c-set-offset} call is reached, most
7095 likely because @ccmode{} is being autoloaded. Instead of putting the
7096 @code{c-set-offset} line in your top-level @file{.emacs} file, put it
7097 in your @code{c-initialization-hook} (@pxref{CC Hooks}), or simply
7098 modify @code{c-offsets-alist} directly:
7099
7100 @example
7101 (setq c-offsets-alist '((substatement-open . 0)))
7102 @end example
7103
7104 @item
7105 @cindex open paren in column zero
7106 @emph{I have an open paren character at column zero inside a comment or
7107 multiline string literal, and it causes the fontification and/or
7108 indentation to go haywire. What gives?}
7109
7110 It's due to the ad-hoc rule in (X)Emacs that such open parens always
7111 start defuns (which translates to functions, classes, namespaces or any
7112 other top-level block constructs in the @ccmode{} languages).
7113 @ifset XEMACS
7114 @xref{Defuns,,, xemacs, XEmacs User's Manual}, for details.
7115 @end ifset
7116 @ifclear XEMACS
7117 @xref{Left Margin Paren,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}, for details
7118 (@xref{Defuns,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}, in the Emacs 20 manual).
7119 @end ifclear
7120
7121 This heuristic is built into the core syntax analysis routines in
7122 (X)Emacs, so it's not really a @ccmode{} issue. However, in Emacs
7123 21.1 it became possible to turn it off@footnote{Using the variable
7124 @code{open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start}.} and @ccmode{} does so
7125 there since it's got its own system to keep track of blocks.
7126
7127 @end itemize
7128
7129
7130 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7131 @node Updating CC Mode, Mailing Lists and Bug Reports, FAQ, Top
7132 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7133 @appendix Getting the Latest CC Mode Release
7134 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7135
7136 @ccmode{} has been standard with all versions of Emacs since 19.34 and
7137 of XEmacs since 19.16.
7138
7139 @cindex web site
7140 Due to release schedule skew, it is likely that all of these Emacsen
7141 have old versions of @ccmode{} and so should be upgraded. Access to the
7142 @ccmode{} source code, as well as more detailed information on Emacsen
7143 compatibility, etc.@: are all available on the web site:
7144
7145 @quotation
7146 @uref{http://cc-mode.sourceforge.net/}
7147 @end quotation
7148
7149
7150 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7151 @node Mailing Lists and Bug Reports, GNU Free Documentation License, Updating CC Mode, Top
7152 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7153 @appendix Mailing Lists and Submitting Bug Reports
7154 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7155
7156 @kindex C-c C-b
7157 @findex c-submit-bug-report
7158 @findex submit-bug-report (c-)
7159 To report bugs, use the @kbd{C-c C-b} (bound to
7160 @code{c-submit-bug-report}) command. This provides vital information
7161 we need to reproduce your problem. Make sure you include a concise,
7162 but complete code example. Please try to boil your example down to
7163 just the essential code needed to reproduce the problem, and include
7164 an exact recipe of steps needed to expose the bug. Be especially sure
7165 to include any code that appears @emph{before} your bug example, if
7166 you think it might affect our ability to reproduce it.
7167
7168 Please try to produce the problem in an Emacs instance without any
7169 customizations loaded (i.e., start it with the @samp{-q --no-site-file}
7170 arguments). If it works correctly there, the problem might be caused
7171 by faulty customizations in either your own or your site
7172 configuration. In that case, we'd appreciate it if you isolate the
7173 Emacs Lisp code that triggers the bug and include it in your report.
7174
7175 @cindex bug report mailing list
7176 Reporting a bug using @code{c-submit-bug-report} files it in
7177 the GNU Bug Tracker at @url{http://debbugs.gnu.org}, then sends it on
7178 to @email{bug-cc-mode@@gnu.org}. You can also send reports, other
7179 questions, and suggestions (kudos?@: @t{;-)} to that address. It's a
7180 mailing list which you can join or browse an archive of; see the web site at
7181 @uref{http://cc-mode.sourceforge.net/} for further details.
7182
7183 @cindex announcement mailing list
7184 If you want to get announcements of new @ccmode{} releases, send the
7185 word @emph{subscribe} in the body of a message to
7186 @email{cc-mode-announce-request@@lists.sourceforge.net}. It's possible
7187 to subscribe from the web site too. Announcements will also be posted
7188 to the Usenet newsgroups @code{gnu.emacs.sources}, @code{comp.emacs},
7189 @code{comp.emacs.xemacs}, @code{comp.lang.c}, @code{comp.lang.c++},
7190 @code{comp.lang.objective-c}, @code{comp.lang.java.softwaretools},
7191 @code{comp.lang.idl}, and @code{comp.lang.awk}.
7192 @c There is no newsgroup for Pike. :-(
7193
7194
7195 @node GNU Free Documentation License, Command and Function Index, Mailing Lists and Bug Reports, Top
7196 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
7197 @include doclicense.texi
7198
7199
7200 @c Removed the tentative node "Mode Initialization" from here, 2005/8/27.
7201 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7202 @node Command and Function Index, Variable Index, GNU Free Documentation License, Top
7203 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7204 @unnumbered Command and Function Index
7205 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7206
7207 Since most @ccmode{} commands are prepended with the string
7208 @samp{c-}, each appears under its @code{c-@var{thing}} name and its
7209 @code{@var{thing} (c-)} name.
7210 @iftex
7211 @sp 2
7212 @end iftex
7213 @printindex fn
7214
7215
7216 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7217 @node Variable Index, Concept and Key Index, Command and Function Index, Top
7218 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7219 @unnumbered Variable Index
7220 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7221
7222 Since most @ccmode{} variables are prepended with the string
7223 @samp{c-}, each appears under its @code{c-@var{thing}} name and its
7224 @code{@var{thing} (c-)} name.
7225 @iftex
7226 @sp 2
7227 @end iftex
7228 @printindex vr
7229
7230
7231 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7232 @node Concept and Key Index, , Variable Index, Top
7233 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7234 @unnumbered Concept and Key Index
7235 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7236
7237 @printindex cp
7238
7239
7240 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7241 @comment Epilogue.
7242 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7243
7244 @bye